HP LaserJet 5200 Printer series Technical Reference
Below you will find brief information for LaserJet 5200, LaserJet 5200L. This document provides technical details on the printer's software, including installation instructions, driver configuration, and features like duplex printing, job storage, and watermarking, helping users set up and optimize their printing experience.
PDF
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
HP LaserJet 5200/5200L Printer Software Technical Reference HP LaserJet 5200/5200L printer Software Technical Reference Copyright and license Trademark credits ©2006 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®, PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Edition 1, 11/2006 Corel® is a trademark or registered trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited. EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo® are US registered marks of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. FireWire® FireWire is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Java™ is a US trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Pentium® is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Table of contents 1 Purpose and scope Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 1 Device features .................................................................................................................................... 4 Printing-system software ...................................................................................................................... 7 System requirements ........................................................................................................... 7 Windows .............................................................................................................. 7 Linux .................................................................................................................... 7 UNIX .................................................................................................................... 7 Operating-system support .................................................................................................. 7 Standalone drivers .............................................................................................. 8 Print driver support in other operating systems ................................................... 8 Availability ........................................................................................................................... 9 Printing-system software on the Web ............................................................... 10 In-box printing-system software CDs ................................................................ 10 Windows partition ............................................................................. 11 CD versions ...................................................................................... 11 HP LaserJet documentation ............................................................................................................... 17 HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide ........................................................................................... 18 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes ......................................... 19 HP Embedded Web Server User Guide ............................................................................ 19 HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide .................................................................................... 20 2 Software description Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 21 MS Windows printing-system software .............................................................................................. 22 Printing system and installer .............................................................................................. 22 HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD for MS Windows systems ...... 22 Installer features ................................................................................................ 24 HP LaserJet print drivers ................................................................................................... 25 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers .................................................... 26 Print-driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems .................... 26 MS Windows driver configuration ....................................................................................................... 28 Driver autoconfiguration ..................................................................................................... 28 Bidirectional communication .............................................................................................. 28 Enterprise AutoConfiguration ............................................................................................. 29 Update Now ....................................................................................................................... 30 HP Driver Preconfiguration ................................................................................................ 31 Lockable features ............................................................................................. 33 Continuous export ............................................................................................ 33 ENWW iii HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool ........................................................................................... 35 HP Easy Printer Care ......................................................................................................................... 36 HP Embedded Web Server ............................................................................................................... 37 Access to the HP EWS ...................................................................................................... 37 The HP EWS frame ........................................................................................................... 38 Information tab ................................................................................................................... 38 Links to off-product solutions ............................................................................................. 39 Device Status screen ........................................................................................................ 39 Configuration Page ........................................................................................................... 40 Settings tab ........................................................................................................................ 41 Configure device ................................................................................................................ 42 Alerts .................................................................................................................................. 42 Security .............................................................................................................................. 44 Networking tab .................................................................................................................. 45 Configuration ..................................................................................................... 46 Security section ................................................................................................. 47 Diagnostics section ........................................................................................... 47 HP Web Jetadmin .............................................................................................................................. 48 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 49 Font support ....................................................................................................................................... 50 Basic fonts ........................................................................................................................ 50 Default fonts ....................................................................................................................... 50 Print-driver install instructions ............................................................................................................ 56 General MS Windows install instructions .......................................................................... 56 Install from the printing-system CD ................................................................... 56 Install from a network or from downloaded files ............................................... 57 Detailed MS Windows install instructions .......................................................................... 57 Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons .............................................................. 57 Modify a pre-existing installation ....................................................................... 58 Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port ................................ 58 Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence ............................... 59 Install print drivers by using Add Printer ............................................................ 82 Installer Customization Wizard for Windows ..................................................... 83 Run the Installer Customization Wizard ........................................... 84 Dialogs .............................................................................................. 84 Distribution ...................................................................................... 101 Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ........................................................ 102 Set a default printer ......................................................................................................... 102 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 103 Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me ................................................................. 105 Device control panel ........................................................................................................ 105 Software-program print-dialog box .................................................................................. 105 Print-driver user interface ................................................................................................ 105 Help system ...................................................................................................................................... 107 What's this? Help ............................................................................................................. 107 iv ENWW Context-sensitive Help ..................................................................................................... 107 Incompatible Options messages ..................................................................................... 107 Bubble Help ..................................................................................................................... 108 Finishing tab features ....................................................................................................................... 110 Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 111 Default Print Settings ...................................................................................... 111 User Guide Print Settings ............................................................................... 114 Document Options ........................................................................................................... 114 Correct Order for Rear Bin .............................................................................. 114 Print on Both Sides ......................................................................................... 115 Automatically print on both sides ................................................... 116 Manually printing on both sides ...................................................... 116 Flip Pages Up .................................................................................................. 118 Booklet Printing ............................................................................................... 119 Book and Booklet Printing .............................................................. 119 Print a booklet ................................................................................. 120 Pages per Sheet ............................................................................................. 120 Print Page Borders .......................................................................................... 120 Page Order ...................................................................................................... 121 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 121 Print Quality ..................................................................................................................... 122 Best Quality ..................................................................................................... 122 Faster Printing ................................................................................................. 122 Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ................................ 122 Current Setting ............................................................................... 123 Font Settings .................................................................................. 123 Output Settings ............................................................................... 123 Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver ................................ 124 Current Setting ............................................................................... 125 Graphic Settings ............................................................................. 125 Font Settings ................................................................................. 125 Output Settings ............................................................................... 125 Effects tab features .......................................................................................................................... 127 Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 128 Fit To Page ...................................................................................................................... 128 Print Document On ......................................................................................... 128 Scale to Fit ...................................................................................................... 128 % of Normal Size ............................................................................................ 129 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 129 Watermarks ..................................................................................................................... 130 Current Watermarks ........................................................................................ 130 First Page Only ............................................................................................... 130 Edit… .............................................................................................................. 130 Current Watermarks ....................................................................... 131 Watermark Message ...................................................................... 132 Message Angle ............................................................................... 132 Document preview image ............................................................... 132 Font Attributes ................................................................................ 132 Default watermark settings ............................................................. 133 Paper tab features ............................................................................................................................ 135 ENWW v Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 136 Paper Options .................................................................................................................. 136 Size is .............................................................................................................. 136 Custom ............................................................................................................ 137 Name .............................................................................................. 138 Save, Delete, or Rename ............................................................... 139 Custom size (width and height controls) ......................................... 140 Custom width and height control limits ........................................... 140 Dynamic measurement units ......................................................... 141 Close .............................................................................................. 141 Source is ......................................................................................................... 141 Type is ............................................................................................................ 142 Use Different Paper/Covers ............................................................................ 143 Front Cover ..................................................................................... 143 First Page ....................................................................................... 144 Other Pages ................................................................................... 145 Last Page ....................................................................................... 145 Back Cover ..................................................................................... 146 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 147 Device image ................................................................................................................... 147 Job Storage tab features .................................................................................................................. 148 Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 151 Status dialog box ............................................................................................................. 151 Job Storage Mode ........................................................................................................... 151 Off ................................................................................................................... 151 Proof and Hold ................................................................................................ 151 Private Job ...................................................................................................... 152 PIN ................................................................................................................................... 152 Job Notification Options ................................................................................................... 152 User Name ....................................................................................................................... 152 Job Name ........................................................................................................................ 153 Using job-storage features when printing ........................................................................ 153 Releasing a job-storage print job .................................................................... 154 Deleting a job-storage print job ....................................................................... 154 Basics tab features .......................................................................................................................... 155 Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 156 Copies .............................................................................................................................. 156 Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 156 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 157 About… ............................................................................................................................ 157 Configure tab features ..................................................................................................................... 159 Printer Model ................................................................................................................... 160 Paper Handling Options ................................................................................................... 161 Duplexing unit ................................................................................................. 162 Allow Manual Duplexing .................................................................................. 162 Mopier Enabled .............................................................................................. 162 Mopier mode and collation ............................................................. 162 Optional Paper Sources ................................................................................. 163 Other Options .................................................................................................................. 163 Storage ............................................................................................................ 164 vi ENWW Fonts ............................................................................................................... 164 Alternative Letterhead Mode ........................................................................... 166 Ignore Application Collation ............................................................................ 166 Printer Memory ................................................................................................ 166 Include Types in Application Source List ....................................................... 166 Automatic configuration ................................................................................................... 166 Printer image ................................................................................................................... 167 HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features ..................................................................... 168 Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me ................................................ 168 PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet 5200 .......................................................... 169 Help system ..................................................................................................................... 169 What's this Help .............................................................................................. 169 Context-sensitive Help .................................................................................... 169 Paper tab features ........................................................................................................... 169 Paper size ....................................................................................................... 171 Layout ............................................................................................................. 172 Orientation ....................................................................................................... 172 Paper source ................................................................................................... 172 Copies ............................................................................................................. 173 Unprintable Area… .......................................................................................... 173 More Options… ............................................................................................... 173 About … .......................................................................................................... 174 Restore Defaults ............................................................................................. 174 Graphics tab features ...................................................................................................... 174 Resolution ...................................................................................................... 175 Halftoning ........................................................................................................ 176 Special ............................................................................................................ 176 Scaling ............................................................................................................ 176 Restore Defaults ............................................................................................. 176 Fonts tab features ............................................................................................................ 176 Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table ....... 177 Font Substitution Table ................................................................... 177 Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts ............................. 178 Always use TrueType fonts ............................................................................. 178 Send Fonts As… ............................................................................ 178 Restore Defaults ............................................................................. 180 Device Options tab features ............................................................................................ 180 Available printer memory ................................................................................ 182 Printer features ................................................................................................ 182 FastRes 1200 ................................................................................. 182 User ................................................................................................ 183 PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) ............................................................ 183 PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) ............................................................ 183 PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) ............................................................ 183 PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) ............................................................ 183 HPPJLEncoding ............................................................................. 183 Economode .................................................................................... 183 Job storage ..................................................................................... 183 Collate ............................................................................................ 185 Fit to Page ...................................................................................... 185 ENWW vii Print Quality .................................................................................... 185 Watermark ...................................................................................... 185 Watermark (Pages per Sheet) ........................................................ 186 Watermark Font .............................................................................. 186 Watermark Size .............................................................................. 186 Watermark Angle ............................................................................ 186 Watermark Style ............................................................................. 187 Watermark Intensity ........................................................................ 187 Print Watermark .............................................................................. 187 Installable options ........................................................................................... 187 Tray 3 ............................................................................................. 188 Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) ................................................... 188 Printer Hard Disk ............................................................................ 188 Mopier Mode ................................................................................... 188 Job Storage .................................................................................... 188 VMOption ........................................................................................ 189 Restore Defaults ............................................................................................. 189 PostScript tab features .................................................................................................... 189 PostScript output format .................................................................................. 190 PostScript header ............................................................................................ 191 Print PostScript error information .................................................................... 191 PostScript timeout values ................................................................................ 191 Advanced… ..................................................................................................... 191 PostScript Language Level ............................................................. 192 Bitmap compression ....................................................................... 192 Data format ..................................................................................... 193 Send CTRL+D before job ............................................................... 193 Send CTRL+D after job ................................................................. 193 Restore Defaults ............................................................................................. 193 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 195 Access to print drivers in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ....................... 197 Device control panel ........................................................................................................ 197 Software-program print-dialog box .................................................................................. 197 Print-driver user interface ................................................................................................ 197 Printing Preferences driver tabs ...................................................................... 197 Properties driver tabs ...................................................................................... 198 Help system ...................................................................................................................................... 199 What's this? Help ............................................................................................................. 199 Context-sensitive Help ..................................................................................................... 199 Incompatible Print Settings messages ............................................................................. 199 Advanced tab features ..................................................................................................................... 201 Paper/Output ................................................................................................................... 202 Copy Count .................................................................................................... 203 Collated ........................................................................................................... 203 Graphic ............................................................................................................................ 203 True Type Font ................................................................................................ 203 Document Options ........................................................................................................... 204 Advanced Printing Features ............................................................................ 204 viii ENWW Print Optimizations ......................................................................................... 204 PostScript Options .......................................................................................... 204 Printer Features .............................................................................................. 205 Layout Options ................................................................................................ 206 Paper/Quality tab features ................................................................................................................ 207 Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 208 Default Print Settings ...................................................................................... 209 User Guide Print Settings ................................................................................ 211 Default Print Settings ...................................................................................... 212 Paper Options .................................................................................................................. 212 Size is .............................................................................................................. 213 Custom Paper Size ......................................................................................... 213 Name .............................................................................................. 214 Paper size ....................................................................................... 214 Units ............................................................................................... 215 Custom width and height control limits ........................................... 215 Source is ......................................................................................................... 215 Type is ............................................................................................................. 216 Use Different Paper/Covers ............................................................................................. 217 Front Cover ..................................................................................................... 217 First Page ........................................................................................................ 218 Other Pages .................................................................................................... 219 Last Page ........................................................................................................ 220 Back Cover ...................................................................................................... 221 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 222 Print Quality ..................................................................................................................... 222 Print Quality drop-down menu ......................................................................... 223 EconoMode ..................................................................................................... 223 Effects tab features .......................................................................................................................... 225 Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 226 Resizing Options .............................................................................................................. 227 Actual Size ...................................................................................................... 227 Print Document On ......................................................................................... 227 Scale to Fit ..................................................................................................... 227 % of Normal Size ............................................................................................ 228 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 228 Watermarks ..................................................................................................................... 228 Current watermarks ......................................................................................... 230 Watermark Message ....................................................................................... 230 Message Angle ............................................................................................... 230 Font Attributes ................................................................................................. 230 Default watermark settings .............................................................................. 231 Finishing tab features ....................................................................................................................... 233 Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 234 Document options ............................................................................................................ 235 Correct Order for Rear Bin .............................................................................. 235 Print on Both Sides ......................................................................................... 235 Automatically print on both sides ................................................... 236 Manually print on both sides ........................................................... 236 Flip Pages Up .................................................................................................. 238 ENWW ix Booklet layout .................................................................................................. 239 Book and Booklet Printing .............................................................. 239 Print a booklet ................................................................................. 239 Pages per Sheet ............................................................................................. 240 Print Page Borders .......................................................................................... 240 Page Order ...................................................................................................... 240 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 241 Orientation ....................................................................................................................... 241 Job Storage tab features .................................................................................................................. 242 Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 245 Status group box .............................................................................................................. 245 Job Storage Mode ........................................................................................................... 245 Off ................................................................................................................... 245 Proof and Hold ............................................................................................... 245 Private Job ...................................................................................................... 246 Require PIN ..................................................................................................................... 246 Job Notification Options ................................................................................................... 246 User Name ....................................................................................................................... 247 Job Name ........................................................................................................................ 247 Using job-storage features when printing ........................................................................ 248 Releasing a job-storage print job .................................................................... 248 Deleting a job-storage print job ....................................................................... 249 Services tab features ........................................................................................................................ 250 Internet Services .............................................................................................................. 251 Device services ................................................................................................................ 251 Device Settings tab features ............................................................................................................ 252 Form to Tray Assignment ................................................................................................ 253 Font Substitution Table .................................................................................................... 254 External Fonts .................................................................................................................. 255 Installing external fonts ................................................................................... 255 Removing external fonts ................................................................................. 256 PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings .......................................................................... 256 Available PostScript Memory .......................................................................... 257 Output Protocol ............................................................................................... 257 Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job .......................................................................... 257 Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ............................................................................ 257 Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray ............................................................. 258 Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray ..................................................... 258 Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts ............................................. 258 Job Timeout .................................................................................................... 258 Wait Timeout ................................................................................................... 258 Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline ................................................... 258 Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ................................................. 258 Installable Options ........................................................................................................... 259 Automatic Configuration .................................................................................. 259 Tray 3 .............................................................................................................. 259 Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) .................................................................. 259 Allow Manual Duplexing .................................................................................. 260 Printer Memory ................................................................................................ 260 Printer Hard Disk ............................................................................................. 260 x ENWW Job storage ..................................................................................................... 260 Mopier Mode ................................................................................................... 260 Mopier mode and collation .............................................................................. 261 Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) ................................... 261 JPEG Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) ......................................... 262 About tab features ............................................................................................................................ 263 6 Macintosh Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 265 Macintosh printing-system software ................................................................................................. 266 System requirements ....................................................................................................... 266 Operating-system support ............................................................................................... 266 Mac OS X ........................................................................................................ 266 Mac OS X Classic (Mac OS 9) ....................................................................... 266 Availability ........................................................................................................................ 266 Printing-system software on the Web ............................................................. 267 Printing-system software ................................................................ 267 Software component availability ..................................................... 267 In-box printing-system software CDs .............................................................. 267 Macintosh partition ......................................................................... 267 CD versions .................................................................................... 268 Macintosh install and uninstall instructions ...................................................................................... 270 Macintosh component descriptions ................................................................................. 270 HP LaserJet PPDs .......................................................................................... 270 PDEs ............................................................................................................... 270 HP Embedded Web Server ............................................................................. 271 Install notes ..................................................................................................... 271 Online help ...................................................................................................... 271 Screen fonts .................................................................................................... 271 Install the Macintosh printing system ............................................................................... 271 General installation for Macintosh operating systems ..................................... 272 Detailed Mac OS X installation ........................................................................ 272 Main Install dialog box sequence ................................................... 272 Printer setup .................................................................................................... 277 Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 ............................................ 277 Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3 ............................................ 285 Uninstall the Macintosh printing system .......................................................................... 286 Macintosh HP Printer Utility .............................................................................................................. 287 Access to the HP Printer Utility ........................................................................................ 287 Supplies Status ................................................................................................................ 290 Device Information ........................................................................................................... 293 File Upload ....................................................................................................................... 294 Update Firmware ............................................................................................................. 295 Upload Fonts ................................................................................................................... 295 HP Support ...................................................................................................................... 296 Duplex mode .................................................................................................................... 297 Economode ...................................................................................................................... 298 Resolution ........................................................................................................................ 299 Trays Configuration ......................................................................................................... 300 Lock Resources ............................................................................................................... 301 ENWW xi Stored Jobs ...................................................................................................................... 302 E-mail Alerts .................................................................................................................... 303 Network Settings .............................................................................................................. 304 Bonjour Setting ................................................................................................................ 305 Additional Settings ........................................................................................................... 306 Macintosh remote firmware updates ................................................................................................ 308 Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection ......................... 308 Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility .................................................. 309 Macintosh, print print-ready documents ........................................................................................... 310 7 Engineering Details Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 311 File to E-mail utility ........................................................................................................................... 312 Media attributes ................................................................................................................................ 314 Media sources and destinations ...................................................................................... 314 Media-source commands ................................................................................................ 314 Driver-supported media sizes .......................................................................................... 315 Driver-supported media types .......................................................................................... 317 Custom paper sizes ......................................................................................................... 318 Media-type commands .................................................................................................... 319 Remote firmware updates ............................................................................................................... 320 Determining the current level of firmware ....................................................................... 320 Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site .................................................... 321 Downloading the new firmware to the device .................................................................. 321 Printer messages during the firmware update ................................................................ 321 Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser ............................................. 323 Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection ......................... 324 Remote firmware update through a local MS Windows port ........................................... 325 Windows 98 or Windows Me ........................................................................... 325 Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 .... 326 Remote firmware update through a USB port .................................................................. 327 Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network ........................................... 327 Remote firmware update for UNIX systems ................................................................... 328 Remote firmware update by using the LPR command ................................................... 328 Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin ..................................................... 329 Printing print-ready documents ....................................................................................................... 331 Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser ................................................. 331 Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection ............................. 332 Print-ready printing by using a local MS Windows port ................................................... 333 Windows 98 or Windows Me ........................................................................... 333 Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 .... 334 Print-ready file printing in an MS Windows network ........................................................ 334 Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems ......................................................................... 334 Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command ....................................................... 334 Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems ................................................................. 336 Job-stream output ........................................................................................................... 337 PJL/PJL Encoding ........................................................................................................... 337 Job tracking ..................................................................................................................... 337 Connectivity/Printing ........................................................................................................ 338 Bidirectional communication ........................................................................................... 339 xii ENWW HP Driver Preconfiguration ............................................................................................. 339 Bundle support ................................................................................................................. 340 Tray and paper assignment ............................................................................................. 340 Installable options ........................................................................................................... 340 Printer services ............................................................................................................... 341 UI features ...................................................................................................................... 341 Help features .................................................................................................................. 342 Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................................... 342 Media sizes ...................................................................................................................... 343 Media types ..................................................................................................................... 343 Job storage ..................................................................................................................... 343 Print quality and resolution .............................................................................................. 344 Reordering Options .......................................................................................................... 345 Resizing options .............................................................................................................. 345 Color settings ................................................................................................................... 345 Watermarks ..................................................................................................................... 346 Alternative source/paper type .......................................................................................... 346 Printing destination .......................................................................................................... 347 Finishing options and duplexing ...................................................................................... 347 Other document options .................................................................................................. 347 Font support ..................................................................................................................... 348 Postscript-specific features .............................................................................................. 348 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 351 ENWW xiii xiv ENWW List of tables Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview .............................................................................................. 1 Table 1-2 HP LaserJet 5200 printer features ..................................................................................................... 4 Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP LaserJet 5200 printer .......................................................... 9 Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe ....................................................................................................... 13 Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe ............................................................................................................... 13 Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian ............................................................................. 14 Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe ................................................................................................................. 15 Table 1-8 CD AS – Asia ................................................................................................................................... 16 Table 1-9 Documentation availability ............................................................................................................... 17 Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP LaserJet 5200 printer ................................................................. 26 Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 ................................................................................. 28 Table 2-3 EAC availability in MS Windows and Microsoft Share ..................................................................... 29 Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments ........................................................................... 30 Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration .......................................................... 33 Table 3-1 Default fonts ..................................................................................................................................... 50 Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts .......................................................................................................... 52 Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer ........................................... 112 Table 4-2 Page orientation ............................................................................................................................. 118 Table 4-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks .................................................................. 134 Table 4-4 Name drop-down menu text strings ............................................................................................... 139 Table 4-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes ............................................................................................................. 140 Table 4-6 Close dialog-box text strings .......................................................................................................... 141 Table 4-7 Printer-model configuration settings .............................................................................................. 161 Table 4-8 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings ..................................................................................... 163 Table 5-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer ........................................... 209 Table 5-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes ............................................................................................................ 215 Table 5-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks .................................................................. 232 Table 5-4 Page orientation ............................................................................................................................. 238 Table 5-5 Driver mopier mode and collation settings .................................................................................... 261 Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems .......................................................................... 272 Table 7-1 HP LaserJet 5200 media sources and destinations ...................................................................... 314 Table 7-2 Media-source commands .............................................................................................................. 314 Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes ............................................................................................ 315 Table 7-4 Supported input media types ......................................................................................................... 317 Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes ............................................................................................................ 318 Table 7-6 Media-type commands ................................................................................................................... 319 Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update .............................................................................................. 321 Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure .................................................................................... 322 Table 7-9 Update messages .......................................................................................................................... 322 ENWW xv Table 7-10 Table 7-11 Table 7-12 Table 7-13 Table 7-14 Table 7-15 Table 7-16 Table 7-17 Table 7-18 Table 7-19 Table 7-20 Table 7-21 Table 7-22 Table 7-23 Table 7-24 Table 7-25 Table 7-26 Table 7-27 Table 7-28 Table 7-29 Table 7-30 Table 7-31 Table 7-32 Table 7-33 Table 7-34 Table 7-35 Table 7-36 xvi Driver support for the job-stream output feature .......................................................................... 337 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding ........................................................................... 337 Driver support for job tracking ...................................................................................................... 337 Driver support for connectivity features ...................................................................................... 338 Driver support for the bidirectional communication features ....................................................... 339 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration ............................................................................. 339 Bundle support ............................................................................................................................. 340 Tray and paper assignment ......................................................................................................... 340 Driver support for installable options ............................................................................................ 340 Printer services (Services tab) ..................................................................................................... 341 Driver support for UI features ....................................................................................................... 341 Driver support for Help features ................................................................................................... 342 Driver support for Print Task Quick Sets ...................................................................................... 342 Driver support for media sizes ..................................................................................................... 343 Driver support for media types ..................................................................................................... 343 Driver support for the job-storage features ................................................................................. 343 Print-quality and resolution features ............................................................................................ 344 Driver support for the reordering options ..................................................................................... 345 Resizing options ........................................................................................................................... 345 Color settings ............................................................................................................................... 345 Driver support for watermarks feature ......................................................................................... 346 Driver support for the alternate source/paper type feature .......................................................... 346 Driver support for the printing-destination feature ........................................................................ 347 Duplexing ..................................................................................................................................... 347 Other document options ............................................................................................................... 347 Font support ................................................................................................................................. 348 Driver support for postscript-specific features ............................................................................. 348 ENWW List of figures Figure 1-1 Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7 Figure 3-8 Figure 3-9 Figure 3-10 Figure 3-11 Figure 3-12 Figure 3-13 Figure 3-14 Figure 3-15 Figure 3-16 Figure 3-17 Figure 3-18 Figure 3-19 Figure 3-20 Figure 3-21 Figure 3-22 Figure 3-23 Figure 3-24 Figure 3-25 Figure 3-26 Figure 3-27 Figure 3-28 Figure 3-29 Figure 3-30 ENWW Installation software CD printer-documentation screen .................................................................. 17 Installation software CD browser ................................................................................................... 23 HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen ........................................................................... 39 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 1 of 3 ....................................................... 40 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 2 of 3 ....................................................... 41 HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen .......................................................................... 42 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 1 of 2 .................................................................................. 43 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 2 of 2 .................................................................................. 44 HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen ......................................................................................... 45 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen ...................................................................... 46 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box ......................................................... 58 Cancel dialog box ........................................................................................................................... 58 Language Selection dialog box ...................................................................................................... 59 Welcome to the HP LaserJet 5200 Setup Wizard dialog box ........................................................ 60 Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System ............................................................................... 60 Software License Agreement dialog box ....................................................................................... 61 Printer Connection dialog box ........................................................................................................ 61 Searching dialog box ...................................................................................................................... 62 Firewall Detected dialog box ........................................................................................................... 63 Printer Not Found dialog box ........................................................................................................ 64 Printers Found dialog box ............................................................................................................. 65 Printer Found dialog box ............................................................................................................... 66 Confirm Network Settings dialog box ............................................................................................ 66 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box ........................................................................................... 67 Check Printer Connection dialog box ........................................................................................... 68 Specify Printer dialog box ............................................................................................................. 68 Printer Settings dialog box ............................................................................................................ 69 Set Port Name dialog box ............................................................................................................. 70 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box ............................................................................................ 71 Installation Type dialog box ......................................................................................................... 71 Drivers dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 72 Driver Details dialog box ............................................................................................................... 73 Additional Software dialog box ..................................................................................................... 73 Additional software Details dialog box .......................................................................................... 74 Ready to Install dialog box ........................................................................................................... 75 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab ........................................................................................................ 76 Printer Properties Sharing tab ....................................................................................................... 77 Additional Drivers dialog box ........................................................................................................ 78 Installing dialog box ...................................................................................................................... 79 Finish dialog box ........................................................................................................................... 80 xvii Figure 3-31 Figure 3-32 Figure 3-33 Figure 3-34 Figure 3-35 Figure 3-36 Figure 3-37 Figure 3-38 Figure 3-39 Figure 3-40 Figure 3-41 Figure 3-42 Figure 3-43 Figure 3-44 Figure 3-45 Figure 3-46 Figure 3-47 Figure 3-48 Figure 3-49 Figure 3-50 Figure 3-51 Figure 3-52 Figure 3-53 Figure 4-1 Figure 4-2 Figure 4-3 Figure 4-4 Figure 4-5 Figure 4-6 Figure 4-7 Figure 4-8 Figure 4-9 Figure 4-10 Figure 4-11 Figure 4-12 Figure 4-13 Figure 4-14 Figure 4-15 Figure 4-16 Figure 4-17 Figure 4-18 Figure 4-19 Figure 4-20 Figure 4-21 Figure 4-22 Figure 4-23 Figure 4-24 Figure 4-25 Figure 4-26 Figure 4-27 xviii HP LaserJet 5200 Next Steps dialog box ..................................................................................... 81 Test Page dialog box .................................................................................................................... 81 HP Registration screen ................................................................................................................. 82 Language Selection dialog box ..................................................................................................... 85 Welcome to the HP LaserJet 5200 Installation Customization Wizard screen ............................. 85 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box .................................................................... 86 Language dialog box .................................................................................................................... 87 Printer Port dialog box .................................................................................................................. 88 Browse for Printer dialog box ........................................................................................................ 88 Printer Connection dialog box ....................................................................................................... 89 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box ..................................................................................................... 90 Port Creation Options dialog box .................................................................................................. 91 Drivers dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 92 Driver Details dialog box ............................................................................................................... 93 Additional Software dialog box ..................................................................................................... 94 Additional software Details dialog box .......................................................................................... 95 Custom Installer Location dialog box ............................................................................................ 96 Ready to Create Installer dialog box ............................................................................................. 97 Printer Properties General tab ...................................................................................................... 98 Printer Properties Sharing tab ....................................................................................................... 99 Additional Drivers dialog box ........................................................................................................ 99 Installing dialog box .................................................................................................................... 100 Finish dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 101 A typical constraint message with an OK button .......................................................................... 107 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon ........................................................................................ 108 The default Finishing tab .............................................................................................................. 110 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box .................................................................................. 118 Page-order preview images ........................................................................................................ 121 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ........................................... 122 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver ........................................... 124 Effects tab .................................................................................................................................... 127 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ........................................ 129 Watermark Details dialog box .................................................................................................... 131 Paper tab .................................................................................................................................. 135 Paper Options group box (default) .............................................................................................. 136 Custom Paper Size dialog box .................................................................................................. 137 Front Cover options ................................................................................................................... 143 First Page options ..................................................................................................................... 144 Other Pages options .................................................................................................................. 145 Last Page options ...................................................................................................................... 146 Back Cover setting ..................................................................................................................... 146 Job Storage tab .......................................................................................................................... 150 Basics tab .................................................................................................................................. 155 About This Driver dialog box ...................................................................................................... 158 Configure tab ............................................................................................................................. 160 More Configuration Options dialog box .................................................................................... 164 Configure Font Cards dialog box ............................................................................................... 165 Paper tab .................................................................................................................................... 170 Custom-designed size dialog box ............................................................................................... 171 Page dimensions in inches ......................................................................................................... 172 ENWW Figure 4-28 Figure 4-29 Figure 4-30 Figure 4-31 Figure 4-32 Figure 4-33 Figure 4-34 Figure 4-35 Figure 4-36 Figure 4-37 Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2 Figure 5-3 Figure 5-4 Figure 5-5 Figure 5-6 Figure 5-7 Figure 5-8 Figure 5-9 Figure 5-10 Figure 5-11 Figure 5-12 Figure 5-13 Figure 5-14 Figure 5-15 Figure 5-16 Figure 5-17 Figure 5-18 Figure 5-19 Figure 5-20 Figure 5-21 Figure 5-22 Figure 5-23 Figure 6-1 Figure 6-2 Figure 6-3 Figure 6-4 Figure 6-5 Figure 6-6 Figure 6-7 Figure 6-8 Figure 6-9 Figure 6-10 Figure 6-11 Figure 6-12 Figure 6-13 Figure 6-14 Figure 6-15 Figure 6-16 Figure 6-17 ENWW Unprintable Area dialog box ....................................................................................................... 173 More Paper Options dialog box .................................................................................................. 173 About dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 174 Graphics tab ............................................................................................................................... 175 Fonts tab ..................................................................................................................................... 177 Font Substitution Table .............................................................................................................. 178 Send Fonts As… dialog box ....................................................................................................... 179 Device Options tab ..................................................................................................................... 181 PostScript tab .............................................................................................................................. 190 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box .................................................................................... 192 An Incompatible Print Settings message ...................................................................................... 200 The default appearance of the Advanced tab ............................................................................... 202 Paper/Quality tab ......................................................................................................................... 208 Paper Options group box ............................................................................................................. 212 Custom Paper Size dialog box .................................................................................................... 214 Front Cover options ...................................................................................................................... 217 First Page options ........................................................................................................................ 218 Other Pages options ..................................................................................................................... 219 Last Page options ......................................................................................................................... 220 Back Cover options ..................................................................................................................... 221 Effects tab .................................................................................................................................. 226 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ..................................... 227 Watermark Details dialog box .................................................................................................... 229 Finishing tab ............................................................................................................................... 234 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box ................................................................................ 238 Page-order preview images ....................................................................................................... 241 Job Storage tab .......................................................................................................................... 244 Services tab ................................................................................................................................ 250 HP PCL 6 Unidriver Device Settings tab .................................................................................... 252 PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab ............................................................................... 253 Font Substitution Table ............................................................................................................. 254 HP Font Installer dialog box ...................................................................................................... 255 About tab ..................................................................................................................................... 263 hp LaserJet 5200 CD-ROM icon ................................................................................................... 273 hp LaserJet Software screen ........................................................................................................ 273 HP LaserJet v.5.7 icon .................................................................................................................. 273 Authenticate dialog box ................................................................................................................ 274 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup-screen dialog box ................................................... 274 License dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 275 Easy Install dialog box .................................................................................................................. 275 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install) ........................................................................ 276 Installing dialog box .................................................................................................................... 276 LaserJet ReadMe icon ................................................................................................................ 277 Installation success message ..................................................................................................... 277 Printer list screen ........................................................................................................................ 277 Printer Browser screen ............................................................................................................... 278 Installable Options screen .......................................................................................................... 279 Name & Location screen ............................................................................................................. 280 Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab ............................................................................ 281 More Printers screen ................................................................................................................... 282 xix Figure 6-18 Figure 6-19 Figure 6-20 Figure 6-21 Figure 6-22 Figure 6-23 Figure 6-24 Figure 6-25 Figure 6-26 Figure 6-27 Figure 6-28 Figure 6-29 Figure 6-30 Figure 6-31 Figure 6-32 Figure 6-33 Figure 6-34 Figure 6-35 Figure 6-36 Figure 6-37 Figure 6-38 Figure 6-39 Figure 6-40 Figure 6-41 Figure 6-42 Figure 6-43 Figure 6-44 Figure 7-1 xx IP Printer tab ............................................................................................................................... 283 Printer List screen ....................................................................................................................... 285 Select Printer screen ................................................................................................................... 285 Select Printer screen – printer not selected ................................................................................ 288 Connection Type screen ............................................................................................................. 288 Select Printer screen – printer selected ...................................................................................... 289 Printer Status screen .................................................................................................................. 289 Current Supplies Levels screen .................................................................................................. 290 Supplies Information screen ....................................................................................................... 291 Order Supplies link ...................................................................................................................... 292 Paper Status screen ................................................................................................................... 293 Device Information screen .......................................................................................................... 293 File Upload screen ...................................................................................................................... 294 Update Firmware screen ............................................................................................................. 295 Upload Fonts screen ................................................................................................................... 296 HP Online Support screen .......................................................................................................... 296 HP Instant Support link ............................................................................................................... 297 Duplex Mode screen ................................................................................................................... 298 Economode screen ..................................................................................................................... 299 Resolution screen ....................................................................................................................... 300 Trays Configuration screen ......................................................................................................... 301 Lock Resources screen .............................................................................................................. 302 Enable Job Storing screen .......................................................................................................... 303 E-mail Alerts screen .................................................................................................................... 304 IP Settings screen ....................................................................................................................... 304 Bonjour Settings screen .............................................................................................................. 305 Additional Settings screen .......................................................................................................... 306 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached ......................................................... 312 ENWW Purpose and scope 1 Purpose and scope Introduction This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software. This STR is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care Center (CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS) personnel, and HP LaserJet 5200 printer end users, as appropriate. The following information is included in this STR: ● Descriptions of drivers and platforms, with system modifications ● Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components ● Descriptions of various topics that are associated with the HP LaserJet 5200 printer, including engineering details The following table describes the structure of this STR. Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview Chapter Content Chapter 1, Purpose and scope This chapter contains basic information about the HP LaserJet 5200 printer and its software: ● Overview of the HP LaserJet 5200 printer ● Printing-system software overview, including the following topics: ● Chapter 2, Software description ● System requirements ● Operating-system support ● Availability HP LaserJet software documentation This chapter provides an overview of the printing-system software installer and print drivers. This chapter also contains general information about other software features, including the following topics: ENWW ● Driver configuration for Microsoft (MS) Windows® ● HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool Introduction 1 Purpose and scope Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview (continued) Chapter Content ● HP Embedded Web Server ● HP Web Jetadmin Chapter 3, Install MS Windows printingsystem components This chapter provides instructions for installing the HP LaserJet 5200 printer in MS Windows operating systems by using various installation methods. Chapter 4, HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation print drivers for Windows 98 and MS Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me). This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when printing, including the following topics: Chapter 5, HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ● Releasing a job-storage print job ● Deleting a job-storage print job This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and postscript emulation print unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. This chapter also contains information about using job-storage features when printing, including the following topics: ● Releasing a job-storage print job ● Deleting a job-storage print job Chapter 6, Macintosh This chapter provides instructions for installing and uninstalling the HP LaserJet 5200 printer in Macintosh operating systems and for using Macintosh features. Chapter 7, Engineering details This chapter contains information about the following special topics: ● File to E-mail utility ● Media attributes ● Remote firmware update ● Printing print-ready documents ● Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems For additional information about the location of information within these chapters, see the table of contents. An index is provided in the back of this STR. Additional detailed information about the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software is published in an addendum to this STR. The following information is available only in the addendum: ● Lists of installed files ● System-modification information, such as changes to the registry and registry keys ● Descriptions of known software issues and solutions Topics: 2 ● Device features ● Printing-system software Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW ENWW Purpose and scope ● HP LaserJet documentation Introduction 3 Purpose and scope Device features The following table contains descriptions of the HP LaserJet 5200 printer features that are discussed in this STR. Device configurations might vary among countries/regions. Table 1-2 HP LaserJet 5200 printer features Models Performance ● Base model: HP LaserJet 5200 printer (part number Q7543A) ● HP LaserJet 5200n printer (part number Q7544A) ● HP LaserJet 5200tn printer (part number Q7545A) ● HP LaserJet 5200dtn printer (part number Q7546A) ● HP LaserJet 5200L (part number Q7547A) ● Prints up to 35 pages per minute (ppm) for Letter-size media. The HP LaserJet 5200L prints up to 25 ppm for Lettersize media. Memory User interface 4 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ● First page out in 10 seconds or less from the PowerSave mode. ● Sleep mode ● Wake-time setting available ● Standard base memory: ● 48 MB for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer; expandable to 512 MB ● 48 megabytes (MB) of memory for the HP LaserJet 5200L printer; expandable to 128 MB ● 64 MB for the HP LaserJet 5200n printer; expandable to 512 MB ● 64 MB for the HP LaserJet 5200tn printer; expandable to 512 MB ● 128 MB for the HP LaserJet 5200dtn printer; expandable to 512 MB ● One open EIO slot on all HP LaserJet 5200 printer models (except the HP LaserJet 5200L) ● The HP LaserJet 5200 printer uses 100-pin 133 MHz dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that support 128 or 256 MB of random-access memory (RAM). ● Memory can be expanded to 512 MB (128 MB for the HP LaserJet 5200L) of double data-rate synchronous random access memory (DDR-SRAM) plus 32 MB of memory on the formatter board. ● Two-line back-lit graphical display on control panel ● Enhanced Help with animated graphics ● Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (network-connected printers) ENWW Supported printer personalities Job-storage features Environmental features Fonts Paper handling ENWW ● HP PCL 6 ● HP PCL 5e ● PostScript® (PS) 3 emulation ● Portable-document format (PDF) ● Job-storage features include: ● Proof and hold ● Private jobs ● Personal-identification number (PIN) printing ● Sleep-mode setting ● High content of recyclable components and materials ● Energy Star® compliant ● Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive compliant ● Internal fonts are available for both printer command language (PCL) and postscript emulation. ● Printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType® format are available on the printing-system software CD. ● HP Web Jetadmin-supported forms and fonts are on the disk. ● Prints on media sizes from 148 millimeters (mm) x 210 mm (5.83 inches x 8.27 inches) up to 216 mm x 356 mm (8.5 inches x 14 inches; Legal size) ● Tray 1 can process heavy-weight media from 60 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 (16 lb to 53 lb), as well as standard 80-lb cover stock. ● Tray 2 and the optional trays can process media up to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) in weight. ● Prints on a wide range of media types, including HP photo media, glossy papers, transparencies, heavy stock, labels, and envelopes. ● Features adjustable gloss level on page by choosing the appropriate glossy-media type. ● Standard 100-sheet multipurpose paper tray (tray 1) supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media. ● Standard 250-sheet paper feeder (tray 2) supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media. ● Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3; standard in the HP LaserJet 5200tn and HP LaserJet 5200dtn printer models) supports Letter, Legal, Executive, 8.5 x 13, B5 (JIS), Executive (JIS), A4, and custom media. ● Standard 250-sheet face-down output bin Device features Purpose and scope Table 1-2 HP LaserJet 5200 printer features (continued) 5 Purpose and scope Table 1-2 HP LaserJet 5200 printer features (continued) Accessories Connectivity Supplies 6 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ● Standard duplexing unit for automatic two-sided (duplex) printing on the HP LaserJet 5200dtn printer ● Automatic duplexing at up to 30 sides (15 sheets) per minute for 120-g/m2 (32-lb) paper ● Dual inline memory modules (DIMM) ● Flash memory slot for additional memory or additional fonts ● Additional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) ● Enhanced input/output (EIO) card slots for optional connectivity (Network connection through an HP Jetdirect embedded print server are standard on the HP LaserJet 5200n, HP LaserJet 5200tn, and HP LaserJet 5200dtn models.) ● Universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection ● HP Jetdirect embedded print server for network connectivity without using an EIO slot ● Bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE 1284Bcompliant); available with the optional 1284B parallel EIO card (part number J7972G) ● The supplies status page contains information about toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining for genuine HP cartridges. ● High-capacity no-shake cartridge with automatic tonerseal removal feature ● The printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges when a cartridge is installed. ● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the HP Embedded Web Server ENWW Purpose and scope Printing-system software Topics: ● System requirements ● Operating-system support ● Availability System requirements The following operating systems support the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software: ● Windows ● Linux ● UNIX Windows ● Pentium® or compatible processor ● Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows 2000: 333-MHz processor with 64 MB RAM ● Windows XP: 333-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM ● Windows Server 2003: 550-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM (Standard Edition) and 220 MB of available hard-disk space ● Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640 x 480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA]) ● Onboard parallel port, USB port, or network connection ● CD-ROM drive or internet connection Linux For information about Linux support for the printer, see the following HP Linux Web site: ● www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting UNIX For information about UNIX® support for the printer, see the following Web sites: ● www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software ● www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts Operating-system support MS Windows operating systems provide full-featured support for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Operating systems that are not described in this document provide varying levels of functionality. Throughout this document, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP Professional, and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise. ENWW Printing-system software 7 Purpose and scope Information relating to networking functions is specific to devices that have network capabilities. If the computer is running a 64-bit MS Windows operating system, install the corresponding 64-bit print driver by using the MS Windows Add Printer feature. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer has not been tested with and is not supported in the MS Windows 3.1x or MS Windows 95 operating systems. The MS Windows NT® 4.0 operating system does not support the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Print drivers for the device are not included on the printing-system software CD and are not available on the Web. Other drivers might work on the printer, but some print-driver features and functions might not be available. For more information about the HP LaserJet 5200 printer, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/lj5200 Topics: ● Standalone drivers ● Print driver support in other operating systems Standalone drivers The following operating systems support the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software, including the HP traditional PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers and unidrivers: ● Windows 98 ● Windows Me ● Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2) ● Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit) ● Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 1 and later; 32-bit and 64-bit) ● Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit) Print drivers are supported by the following 64-bit operating systems: ● Itanium-based systems ● AMD Athlon 64, AMD Opteron, Intel Xeon, and Pentium 4 with EMT64) Print driver support in other operating systems The HP LaserJet 5200 printer is also supported in the following operating environments: ● Mac OS X (V10.2.8 or later) ● Linux. For more information, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting ● UNIX. For more information, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software 8 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Purpose and scope ● UNIX model scripts. Available only on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts ● MS Windows Terminal Server ● Citrix Terminal Server. For more information, go to the following Web site: h20000.ww2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Document.jsp Alternatively, go to the HP.com Web site and search for “c00213455”. ● MS Windows Cluster Server 8 ● HP OpenVMS. For more information, go to the following Web site: h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/ ● Tru64 UNIX printing. For more information, go to the following Web site: h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/ ● SAP printing. For more information, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/sap/print ● HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). Available only on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/inpw_software Availability Download the printing-system software from the Web, or order it on a CD from HP fulfillment centers. NOTE This document describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This document does not describe any drivers that might be released for use by support personnel. The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system. NOTE Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit drivers and components are available only on the Web. All other drivers and components listed in the following table are available on the Web and on the printing-system software CD. Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP LaserJet 5200 printer Component Windows 98 and Windows Me Windows 2000, Windows Server 200 3, and Windows XP (32-bit) Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 (64-bit) HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x Drivers HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver PS Emulation Driver ENWW x x Printing-system software 9 Purpose and scope Table 1-3 Software component availability for HP LaserJet 5200 printer (continued) Component Windows 98 and Windows Me Windows 2000, Windows Server 200 3, and Windows XP (32-bit) Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 (64-bit) Common MS Windows Installer x x Installer Customization Wizard x x CD Browser x x Add Printer Wizard install x x Web Registration x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x Installer x Other software Easy Printer Care Software Topics: ● Printing-system software on the Web ● In-box printing-system software CDs Printing-system software on the Web All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web. Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The HP Web site offers an option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases. The HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software is available for download at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/lj5200_software NOTE Only 32-bit print drivers are available on the printing-system software CD. If the computer is running a 64-bit operating system, you must install a 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/lj5200_software In-box printing-system software CDs The software CD for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer contains a variety of files for installing the printingsystem software on the computer. The HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD is divided into two partitions, one for each of the following operating systems: ● MS Windows ● Macintosh Each partition includes documentation files and files that are required to install and uninstall the printingsystem components. 10 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW ● Windows partition ● CD versions Windows partition The root directory in the MS Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file, the SETUP.EXE file, and the following directories and support files: ● Autorun ● Drivers ● Fonts ● hw ● Manuals ● PortMonitor ● System32 ● Temp ● WebReg The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories: ● Drivers ● Manuals NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD. To view the files, insert the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD, right-click Start, click Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive. CD versions The HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD is available in five versions, each of which contains printing-system software in various languages, as follows: ● ENWW CD AM – Americas and Europe (part number Q7533-60101): ● CA = Catalan (Català) ● DE = German (Deutsch) ● EN = English ● ES = Spanish (Español) ● FR = French (Français) ● IT = Italian (Italiano) Printing-system software 11 Purpose and scope Topics: Purpose and scope ● ● ● ● ● NL = Dutch (Nederland) ● PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português) CD WE – Western Europe (part number Q7533-60102): ● DA = Danish (Dansk) ● EN = English ● FI = Finnish (Suomi) ● HE = Hebrew ● NO = Norwegian (Norsk) ● SV = Swedish (Svenska) CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (part number Q7533-60103): ● AR = Arabic ● EN = English ● EL = Greek ● FR = French (Français) ● RU = Russian (Russ) ● TR = Turkish (Turkçe) CD EE – Eastern Europe (part number Q7533-60104): ● CS = Czech (Cesky) ● EN = English ● HU = Hungarian (Magyar) ● PL = Polish (Polski) ● SK = Slovak CD AS – Asia (part number Q7533-60105): ● EN = English ● ID = Indonesian (Bahasa) ● JA = Japanese ● KO = Korean ● TH = Thai ● ZHCN = Simplified Chinese ● ZHTW = Traditional Chinese Each of the following tables lists one of the software CD versions, along with the printing-system software components that are supported in each language. 12 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Purpose and scope NOTE Drivers for various languages do not necessarily correspond to geographic countries/ regions. European languages, for instance, are distributed on three CDs. Table 1-4 CD AM – Americas and Europe Component CA DE EN ES FR IT NL PT HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x x x HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x x x Common MS Windows Installer x x x x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x x Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x x x x x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x x x x x x Printer Usage Report x x x x x x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x x Fonts x x x x x x x HP Web Registration x x x x x x x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x x x x x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.CHM file) x x x x x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x CD Browser Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe ENWW Component DA EN FI HE NO SV HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x Printing-system software 13 Purpose and scope Table 1-5 CD WE – Western Europe (continued) Component DA EN FI HE NO SV HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x Common MS Windows Installer x x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x CD Browser x x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x x x Printer Usage Report x x x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x Fonts x x x x x HP Web Registration x x x x x x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x x x x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.CHM file) x x x x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 PrintingSystem Install Notes x x x x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x x x x x Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian Component AR EN EL FR RU TR HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x Common MS Windows Installer x x x x x x x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer 14 Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x CD Browser x x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x Printer Usage Report x x Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Component AR EN EL FR RU TR HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x x x x Fonts x HP Web Registration x x x x x x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x x x x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.CHM file) x x x x x x x x x x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes x x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x Purpose and scope Table 1-6 CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (continued) x Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe ENWW Component CS EN HU PL SK HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x Common MS Windows Installer x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x Installer Customization Wizard x x x x CD Browser x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x Printer Usage Report x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x Fonts x x x x HP Web Registration x x x x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.CHM file) x x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x x Printing-system software 15 Purpose and scope Table 1-7 CD EE – Eastern Europe (continued) Component CS EN HU PL SK Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes x x x x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x Table 1-8 CD AS – Asia 16 Component EN HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver ID JA KO TH ZHCN ZHTW x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver x x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x Common MS Windows Installer x x x x x x Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x x CD Browser x x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x Printer Usage Report x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x Fonts x HP Web Registration x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.PDF file) x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.CHM file) x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes x x x x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x Chapter 1 Purpose and scope x ENWW On the main screen of the printing-system software CD Browser, click Printer Documentation to open HP LaserJet 5200 Printer Documentation screen, as shown in the following figure. On the main screen of the printing-system software CD Browser, click Printer Documentation to open the HP LaserJet 5200 Printer Documentation screen, as shown in the following example. Figure 1-1 Installation software CD printer-documentation screen The following table lists HP LaserJet 5200 printer documents that are available for each operating system. Table 1-9 Documentation availability ENWW Document Windows 98/ Me Windows 2000/XP/ Server 2003 Macintosh HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.PDF file) x x x HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide (.CHM file) x x Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes x x HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide x x x HP LaserJet documentation 17 Purpose and scope HP LaserJet documentation Purpose and scope Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location: ● Some documents can be opened from the CD Browser. ● Some documents appear on the software CD and can be opened by navigating to the folder where they reside. ● Some documents are available on the Web through links in the CD Browser or CD folders. Documents are available in the following file formats: ● Portable document Format (.PDF). The HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD includes Adobe® Acrobat® Reader for viewing online documentation. ● Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a Microsoft HTML Viewer opens the file on the computer screen. ● Hypertext markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a Web browser opens the file on the computer screen. The following documents are available: ● HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide ● Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes ● HP Embedded Web Server User Guide ● HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide The HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide describes the basic device features. To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps: 1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click User Guide (Interactive). The guide opens as an MS Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: CLJ5200_USE_XXWW.CHM NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the guide is LJ5200_USE_FRWW.CHM 18 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW 1. In the CD Browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click User Guide (Printer Friendly). The guide opens. 3. Print the guide. You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: LJ5200_USE_XXWW.PDF NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the guide is LJ5200_USE_FRWW.PDF When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location. Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes The Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes (in .HTM format) contains important information about device features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance. To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps: 1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click Install Notes. You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: LJ5200_INSTALL-NOTE_XXWW.HTM NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for the French version of the document is LJ5200_INSTALL-NOTE_FRWW.HTM. HP Embedded Web Server User Guide The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide (in .PDF format) provides information about device status, settings, and networking for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. ENWW HP LaserJet documentation 19 Purpose and scope The HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide is provided as a printable .PDF file. To print the guide, follow these steps: Purpose and scope To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps: 1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click Embedded Web Server Guide. You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: LJ5200_EWS_XXWW.PDF NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is LJ5200_EWS_FRWW.PDF. When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location. HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that contains information about connecting the device directly to a network. To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps: 1. In the main screen of the CD browser, click Printer Documentation. 2. Click HP Jetdirect Guide. You can also gain access to the file by following these steps: 1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder. 3. Open the file that has the appropriate file name: HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF NOTE The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF. When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location. 20 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Software description Introduction The HP LaserJet 5200 printer comes with software and installers for MS Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems also support the HP LaserJet 5200, and software is available on the Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, see the section that corresponds to that system. NOTE The HP Toolbox is not available on the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Topics: ENWW ● MS Windows printing-system software ● MS Windows driver configuration ● HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool ● HP Easy Printer Care ● HP Embedded Web Server ● HP Web Jetadmin Introduction 21 Software description 2 MS Windows printing-system software Topics: ● Printing system and installer ● HP LaserJet print drivers Printing system and installer Topics: Software description ● HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD for MS Windows systems ● Installer features HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD for MS Windows systems In the MS Windows environment (Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition [Windows Me], Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003), insert the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive to open an interactive CD browser. Use the CD browser to install the print drivers and related components, and to gain access to online user documentation, a customization utility, Adobe Acrobat Reader software, and optional HP software. The following figure shows the main screen of the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD. If the screen does not appear when you insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps to open the CD browser: 22 1. Click Start. 2. Click Run. 3. Click Browse…. and navigate to the root directory of the software CD. 4. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start the installer. Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-1 Installation software CD browser The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper-left panel and documentation options in the lower-left panel. As you move the cursor over each option, a description of the option appears above the device image. NOTE The options on devices might differ from the illustration. Install Printer. The installation wizard guides you through the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software installation. You are given the choice of performing a Basic Installation, a Full Installation, or a Custom Installation. If you select Basic Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the components that you want to install. Installer Customization Wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP LaserJet 5200 installer by presetting the installation options in a response file. The resulting customized installer can then be used for silent, unattended installation. HP Easy Printer Care Software. Use this option to install the HP Easy Printer Care from a downloadable installation file from the Web. This printer maintenance tool helps track and maintain the printers by providing information about status, alert notifications, usage, and supplies for one or more printers. Register Product. Use this option to register your product online. After Web registration, you can gain access to support and services, manage your profile, and sign up for free support alerts, driver notices, and personalized newsletters. ENWW MS Windows printing-system software 23 Printer Documentation. Use this option to view the HP LaserJet 5200 user documentation. The following document options are available when you click this option: ● User Guide (Interactive) ● User Guide (Printer Friendly) ● Install Notes ● Embedded Web Server Guide ● HP Jetdirect Guide Software description NOTE If Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later is not installed, click any of the links to a portable document format (.PDF) document to open it in a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader that runs from the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD. The CD browser version of Acrobat Reader is in English only, but can be used to open localized versions of .PDF documents. The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on the computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM drive. Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available at the following Web site: www.adobe.com Support. Click the following links to obtain optional software programs for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer and find support information on other HP Web sites: ● Click HP Web Jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web browserbased network-management tool. ● Click Supplies for information about ordering HP LaserJet 5200 printer supplies. ● Click Product Information to open the HP Instant Support Web page for support information and updates for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. ● Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services, support, drivers, and HP online stores. Installer features The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the device. The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. The common installer offers the following features: 24 ● The HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD features an interactive software interface. . ● Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a networked device in a single process. ● The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD. Chapter 2 Software description ENWW The HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD also includes the following features: ● The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility ● The HP Customization Utility for custom installations ● Basic Installation ● Full Installation ● Custom Installation HP LaserJet print drivers HP LaserJet 5200 print drivers provide the printing features and communication between the computer and the device. The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators who are working in the following operating environments: ● Windows 98 and Windows Me ● Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit) MS Windows 64-bit drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available for the following systems: ● ● Itanium ● AMD Athlon 64, AMD Opteron, Intel Xeon, or Pentium 4 with EMT64 Apple Mac OS X (V10.2.8 or later) In MS Windows operating systems, the following features are available with the HP LaserJet 5200 printer: ● Automatic configuration ● Driver updates after a new configuration ● Preconfiguration NOTE For the latest information about the printing-system software components, see the readme files on the CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system software, see the Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5200 Printing-System Install Notes on the printing-system software CD. All of the drivers provide access to paper-handling and print-quality features. Topics: ENWW ● HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers ● Print-driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems MS Windows printing-system software 25 Software description All of the MS Windows system components are installed by using the HP LaserJet 5200 series printingsystem installer. The installer automatically detects the language of choice and the operating system. Select from the following types of installation: HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation drivers All of the MS Windows drivers are supported by Microsoft 32-bit operating systems. Separate versions of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers are available for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64-bit operating systems. These 64-bit drivers are not included on the printingsystem software CD, but they can be downloaded from the following HP Web site: www.hp.com/go/lj5200_software The following drivers are available on the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD: Software description ● The HP PCL 6 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● HP PCL 6 (Black) Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● HP PCL 5 Unidriver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● The HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver (the PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98 and Windows Me ● The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver for Windows 98 and Windows Me ● The HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver (the PS Emulation Driver) for Windows 98 and Windows Me NOTE During a Basic Installation or Full Installation of the printing-system software, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default for Windows 98 and Windows Me. Table 2-1 Print drivers included with the HP LaserJet 5200 printer Operating System1 PCL 6 PCL 5 PS emulation Windows 98 and Windows Me X X X Windows 2000 X X X Windows XP X X X Windows Server 2003 X X X Macintosh OS 1 X Not all device features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for information about the features that are available. Print-driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems Access to print-driver version numbers varies, depending on the operating system in which the HP LaserJet 5200 printer is installed. NOTE For a list of HP LaserJet 5200 print drivers, updated HP printing-system software, and product-support information, go to: www.hp.com/go/lj5200_software 26 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers and Faxes (in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) or Printers (in Windows 2000). 4. Right-click the printer icon. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the About tab. The Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems support the HP LaserJet 5200 PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional print drivers and the PS Emulation Driver. Follow these steps to gain access to an HP traditional PCL driver: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. 6. Click the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver tabs: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Job Storage ● Basics ● Configure The PS Emulation Driver software provides postscript feature support for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Follow these steps to gain access to the print-driver version number: ENWW 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. 6. Click About. MS Windows printing-system software 27 Software description The Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems support the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers. If you are using an HP unidriver in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 environment, follow these steps to find driver-version information: MS Windows driver configuration The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional drivers for MS Windows and the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers feature bidirectional communication technology which, in environments that support the drivers, provide automatic discovery and driver configuration for device accessories at the time of installation. Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). Topics: Software description ● Driver autoconfiguration ● Bidirectional communication ● Enterprise AutoConfiguration ● Update Now ● HP Driver Preconfiguration Driver autoconfiguration Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the following circumstances: ● When a print driver is installed by using Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) ● When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed However, as shown in the following table, driver autoconfiguration and EAC are not available in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems over a direct connection when the HP LaserJet 5200 printer is installed by using the Add Printer Wizard. Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Connection type Add Printer Wizard install Common installer Network Yes Yes Direct connection No Yes Bidirectional communication In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the device during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly. Bidirectional communication is the capability of the device to respond to data inquiries from the computer and report information back, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are connected to the device. Bidirectional communication depends on the network operating system and on the type of connection that exists between the computer and the HP LaserJet 5200. If the connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information back to the host computer. 28 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Enterprise AutoConfiguration Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on the printingsystem software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device. Configuration occurs without user interaction. If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectional-communication software that allows it to communicate with the device and automatically match the print driver with the actual device configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or whenever the Update Now feature is used. If the HP LaserJet 5200 printer configuration changes after installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication by using the Update Now feature. The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network environments that support bidirectional communication. Table 2-3 EAC availability in MS Windows and Microsoft Share Method Installer Connection type Direct connect Parallel Network Jetdirect Microsoft Share1 98 Me NT 4.0 2000 XP 2000/XP host with 2000/XP client NT 4.0 host with NT 4.0 client TCP/IP x x x x x x x2 IPX/SPX x x x x x x x2 TCP/IP (HP) x x x x x x x2 TCP/IP (MS) x x x x x x x2 IPX/SPX (HP) x x x x x x x2 USB Standard ENWW MS Windows MS Windows driver configuration 29 Software description If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the preexisting bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver. Table 2-3 EAC availability in MS Windows and Microsoft Share (continued) Method Add Printer Connection type Direct connect Parallel Network Jetdirect MS Windows Microsoft Share1 Software description 98 Me NT 4.0 2000 XP 2000/XP host with 2000/XP client NT 4.0 host with NT 4.0 client TCP/IP x x x x x x IPX/SPX x x x x x x x2 TCP/IP (HP) x x x x x x x2 x x x x2 x x x x2 USB Standard TCP/IP (MS) IPX/SPX (HP) x x x This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: 1. Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Server host with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 2. Windows NT 4.0 host with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows 98, or Windows Me client. 3. Windows 98 or Windows Me host with any client. In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host. 1 2 Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments Method Connection type Novell Netware 5.x Netware 4.x Installer Direct connect Bindery queue NDS queue Bindery queue NT 4.0 x x x x Parallel USB Network Jetdirect TCP/IP IPX/SPX Standard TCP/IP (HP) TCP/IP (MS1) IPX/SPX (HP) 1 Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service for NetWare. Update Now If the HP LaserJet 5200 printer configuration has been modified since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For example, if the device is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, use the Update Now feature to query the device and update the settings to match the new device configuration. 30 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW The feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the Configure tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and on the Device Settings tab of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver. NOTE The Update Now feature is not available with the HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver. 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click Device Settings. 7. If necessary, click Installable Options to expand it and show the options. 8. In the Automatic Configuration drop-down menu, select Update Now. 9. Click OK to save the setting. Software description To activate the Update Now feature for the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver, follow these steps: NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts. To activate the Update Now feature for the HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5 driver, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. 6. Click Device Settings. 7. Click the Configure tab. 8. In the Automatic Configuration group box, click Update Now. 9. Click OK to save the setting. HP Driver Preconfiguration HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. ENWW MS Windows driver configuration 31 HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be configured: ● Device settings ● Printing-preferences settings The driver is configured to match the device hardware so that access to all of the device accessories through the driver is enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most driver feature settings can also be configured. Software description HP Driver Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories that are installed on the device, or to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration .CFG) file (for example, optional trays, total amount of memory, or job-storage settings). The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps: ● Driver acquisition ● Driver preconfiguration ● Driver installation and deployment These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define the configuration. The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All three are designed with the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the .CFG file, but are packaged differently, either to support established device installation workflows or to leave the deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools support driver preconfiguration: ● HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone MS Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or HP Print Server Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any ordinary MS Windows software program is used. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw ● The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 or workstation. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin adds a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers that are being installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process. The plug-in is limited to Internet Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/web_jetadminplugin.html ● 32 HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer. The Customization Utility features an install-time mode of HP Driver Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a printing-system software driver installation that uses the silent installer. Chapter 2 Software description ENWW For detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools, download the HP Driver Configuration Utility software from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide is included in the download. ● Lockable features ● Continuous export Lockable features The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings: ● Print on Both Sides (duplex). The options are True or False. ● Print in Grayscale. The options are Disable or Enabled. ● Media Type. The options include all the media types that the HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports. ● Paper Source. The options are Printer Auto Select, Manual Feed (Tray 1), Tray 1, or Tray 2. When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users. Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been locked. Continuous export The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back to the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be transferred when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance, if the orientation is set to Landscape in a driver originally installed in Windows 2000, then the orientation setting automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to Windows XP or Windows Server 2003. The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user's perspective and works only between drivers of identical device models. NOTE Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the exportable components are always the same as the components that can be preconfigured. The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration. Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration ENWW Driver Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver Yes Yes N/A1 N/A N/A HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A PS Emulation Driver No No N/A N/A N/A HP PCL 6 Unidriver N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes MS Windows driver configuration 33 Software description Topics: Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration (continued) 1 Driver Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 HP PCL 5 Unidriver N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes PS Emulation Unidriver N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes N/A: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system. Software description 34 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool Use the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool, a Web-based diagnostic software program, to determine whether the correct and most current print driver for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer is in use. Two methods are available to gain access to the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool: 1. Open a Web browser. 2. Go to the following Web site: Software description www.hp.com/go/drivercheck Alternatively: 1. Open an Internet browser. 2. Go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/bsc 3. Click the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar. 4. Click automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool. When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool runs, the devices that are currently installed on the computer appear in a list. The tool gathers information about the device, drivers, and system setup in order to diagnose the software driver configuration and check the print driver. When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is open, select the HP device that you want to check. The tool verifies whether the latest driver is being used, provides feedback if an incorrect driver is being used, and indicates whether an updated driver version is available. Click the latest driver version to download and install it. The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that HP can analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools. No private data is gathered from the computer. ENWW HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 35 HP Easy Printer Care HP Easy Printer Care software is designed for end users and for those who keep printers up and running in small and large business groups. You can view the status of up to 15 supported HP LaserJet printers, set up printer and supply alerts, generate printer-usage reports, and reorder supplies from HP or a choice of resellers. The HP Easy Printer Care Software is available through a link in the printing-system software CD, or on the Web at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare Software description 36 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW HP Embedded Web Server ● HP LaserJet 5200n ● HP LaserJet 5200tn ● HP LaserJet 5200dtn The base model, the HP LaserJet 5200 printer, can use the HP EWS if an optional EIO Jetdirect card is installed. The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one device management. Instead of installing management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin, use HP EWS for remote management in offices that have a limited number of devices. The only requirement is that the management console must have a supported Web browser. In environments that have a larger number of devices, in which one-to-one management is impractical, the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote device management. Use HP Web Jetadmin to consolidate management tasks and perform operations on a selected set of devices. . For such environments, HP provides hooks between the HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin to allow configuration of HP EWS features on multiple devices in one operation. For example, you can set the security password for the HP EWS simultaneously on a cluster of devices. For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to: www.hp.com/ support/lj5200. Topics: ● Access to the HP EWS ● The HP EWS frame ● Information tab ● Links to off-product solutions ● Device Status screen ● Configuration Page ● Settings tab ● Configure device ● Alerts ● Security ● Networking tab Access to the HP EWS To open the HP EWS and view information about the HP LaserJet 5200 printer, open a supported Web browser and type the device transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or host name in the address field. ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 37 Software description The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a standard feature on the following HP LaserJet 5200 printer models when they are connected through a network: To find the device TCP/IP address, look for IP Address on the Embedded Jetdirect page, in the TCP/ IP section. To find the host name of the device, look for Host Name in the TCP/IP section. The TCP/IP address also appears on the device configuration page (the Embedded Jetdirect page), which can be printed from the device control-panel display. Follow these steps to print an Embedded Jetdirect page: (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. Software description 1. Press 2. Press (the up arrow) and (select). 3. Press 4. Press (up) and (the down arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press (down) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION. (select) to print the configuration page. The HP EWS frame Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner, three category tabs, a left-aligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes links to content that is appropriate for that tab. The main-content area shows information and opens options in response to navigation-tab selections and menu-bar selections. Information tab The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab. Click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Information tab to view the information. NOTE If an HP EWS password has been set, the Information tab is the only visible tab until the user logs in. See Security for more information. Not all of the screens on the tab are included in this document. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. 38 ● Device Status. This screen provides current status information about the device. ● Configuration Page. This screen provides information about the device configuration. ● Supplies Status. This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages that have been printed, and the serial number of the device. ● Event log. This screen provides information about reported printer errors. ● Usage page. This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through the device, as well as the number of duplexed pages that have been printed. ● Device Information. This screen shows device information, such as the device TCP/IP address and serial number. ● Control Panel. This screen shows the device control panel. ● Print. Use this screen to print documents that are print-ready, such as those generated by a "print to file" driver option, .PCL documents, .PS documents, .PDF files, and text (.TXT) files. Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Links to off-product solutions ● hp instant support. This link connects to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for the device. Specific status and configuration information about the device is retained and directed to the "Solve a Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible. ● Order Supplies. This link connects to an HP product supplies screen from which you can order genuine HP supplies for the device. ● Product Support. This link connects to an HP product-support screen from which to search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for the device. Device Status screen Status information, such as whether the device is online or the toner is low, is available through a Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the device. You can view this information without going to the device to identify the status. The following figure shows how this information is presented on the device Web page. Figure 2-2 HP EWS Information tab – Device Status screen ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 39 Software description Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks. Configuration Page You can gain access to the HP LaserJet 5200 configuration page remotely through the HP EWS. The HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information about the device in the same way as the configuration page that is printed from the device. The following figures show an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS. Software description Figure 2-3 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 1 of 3 NOTE This figure is provided only as an example. 40 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-4 HP EWS Information tab – Configuration Page screen, 2 of 3 NOTE This figure is provided only as an example. Settings tab The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab. Click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Settings tab to view the information. The Settings tab is shown in the Configure device section. Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. ENWW ● Configure Device. Use the Configure Device screen to print device information pages and configure the device remotely. ● E-mail Server. Use the E-mail Server screen to configure e-mail settings for outgoing e-mail. ● Alerts. IT administrators can configure the device to send alerts in e-mail messages to anyone. ● AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send device configuration and supplies-usage information periodically to your service provider. ● Security. Use the Security screen to manage security for the device. ● Edit Other Links. Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the Web sites of your choice. HP Embedded Web Server 41 Software description ● Device Information. Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the device, assign an asset number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about the device, and the physical location of the device. ● Language. Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens appear. ● Date & Time. Use this page to set the correct date and time for the device. ● Wake Time. Wake time can be set to turn on the device at a certain time on a daily basis. Only one wake-time setting can be established per day; however, each day can have a different wake time. The sleep-mode delay can also be set on this page. Configure device You can obtain device configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS screen and changing the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password controls give management information systems (MIS) managers the level of control that they require within their network environments. The following figure shows an example of device options that can be configured remotely. Figure 2-5 HP EWS Settings tab – Configure Device screen Alerts The device can automatically send e-mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified e-mail addresses. For example, if toner is low, the device can notify the person who is responsible for ordering or changing the print cartridge. If a device failure occurs, the device can send an e-mail alert directly to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured to be sent to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital assistants (PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or uniform resource locators (URLs) for expanded notification. 42 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-6 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 1 of 2 NOTE This figure is provided only as an example. ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 43 Software description Figure 2-7 HP EWS Settings tab – Alerts screen, 2 of 2 NOTE This figure is provided only as an example. Security The HP EWS screens that appear, and the settings on them, vary according to the HP EWS is accessed. Three modes of user access are possible: ● General user ● IT administrator ● Service provider To control access to the HP EWS screens, set a password on the Security page. 44 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW Software description Figure 2-8 HP EWS Settings tab – Security screen In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by using the password. If no password is set (which is the default configuration), all of the tabs are visible. If a password has been set, you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain access to the protected HP EWS tabs (Settings and Networking). Networking tab The HP EWS Networking tab is shown in the following figure. NOTE Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide. ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 45 Software description Figure 2-9 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings screen The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories: ● Configuration ● Security section ● Diagnostics section Configuration ● 46 Network Settings From the Network Settings screen, enable and configure the following network protocols: ● TCP/IP ● Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX) Chapter 2 Software description ENWW ● AppleTalk ● Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC) ● Simple network management protocol (SNMP) ● Other Settings ● Privacy Settings ● Select Language ● Settings ● Authorization ● Mgmt. Protocols Software description Security section Diagnostics section ENWW ● Network Statistics ● Protocol Info ● Configuration Page HP Embedded Web Server 47 HP Web Jetadmin Use the HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect-connected devices within an intranet. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single network-administration server. To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin, and for the latest list of host systems that support HP Web Jetadmin, go to the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin Software description 48 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components Introduction The HP LaserJet 5200 printer comes with software and installers for MS Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems support the HP LaserJet 5200, and software is available on the Web. This document provides procedures for installing and removing the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software for MS Windows operating systems. MS Windows install NOTE If the computer is running a 64-bit MS Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print driver. For instructions, see Install print drivers by using Add Printer. Topics: ENWW ● Font support ● Print-driver install instructions Introduction 49 Font support The following sections list the fonts that are included with MS Windows software, and the fonts that are available on the CD that came with the device. Topics: ● Basic fonts ● Default fonts Basic fonts MS Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing device: MS Windows install ● Arial ● Courier New Italic ● Times New Roman Italic ● Arial Italic ● Courier New Bold ● Times New Roman Bold ● Arial Bold ● Courier New Bold Italic ● Times New Roman Bold Italic ● Arial Bold Italic ● Symbol ● Wingdings ● Courier New ● Times New Roman Default fonts The following default fonts are installed through a Full Installation of the HP LaserJet 5200 printingsystem software. Table 3-1 Default fonts 50 Font name Font style File name Albertus Extra Bold Regular ALBR85W.TTF Albertus Medium Regular ALBR55W.TTF Antique Olive Regular OLVR55W.TTF Antique Olive Bold OLVR75W.TTF Antique Olive Italic OLVR56W.TTF Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW ENWW Font name Font style File name CG Omega Regular CGOR45W.TTF CG Omega Bold CGOR65W.TTF CG Omega Bold Italic CGOR66W.TTF CG Omega Italic CGOR46W.TTF CG Times Regular CGTR45W.TTF CG Times Bold CGTR65W.TTF CG Times Bold Italic CGTR66W.TTF CG Times Italic CGTR46W.TTF Clarendon Condensed Bold CLAR67W.TTF Coronet Regular CORONET.TTF CourierPS Regular CPSR45W.TTF CourierPS Bold CPSR65W.TTF CourierPS Bold Oblique CPSR66W.TTF CourierPS Oblique CPSR46W.TTF Garamond Antiqua GARR45W.TTF Garamond Halbfett GARR65W.TTF Garamond Kursiv GARR46W.TTF Garamond Kursiv Halbfett GARR66W.TTF Helvetica® Regular HELR45W.TTF Helvetica Bold HELR65W.TTF Helvetica Bold Oblique HELR66W.TTF Helvetica Narrow Regular HELR47W.TTF Helvetica Narrow Bold HELR67W.TTF Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique HELR68W.TTF Helvetica Narrow Oblique HELR48W.TTF Helvetica Oblique HELR46W.TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book AVGR45W.TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique AVGR46W.TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Regular AVGR65W.TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique AVGR66W.TTF ITC Bookman Light Regular BOKR35W.TTF ITC Bookman Light Italic BOKR36W.TTF ITC Bookman Demi Regular BOKR75W.TTF ITC Bookman Demi Italic BOKR76W.TTF Font support MS Windows install Table 3-1 Default fonts (continued) 51 Table 3-1 Default fonts (continued) MS Windows install Font name Font style File name ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CHANC___.TTF ITC Zapf Dingbats Regular DINGS___.TTF Letter Gothic Regular LETR45W.TTF Letter Gothic Bold LETR65W.TTF Letter Gothic Italic LETR46W.TTF Marigold Regular MARIGOLD.TTF New Century Schoolbook Bold NCSR75W.TTF New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic NCSR76W.TTF New Century Schoolbook Italic NCSR56W.TTF New Century Schoolbook Roman NCSR55W.TTF Palatino Bold PALR65W.TTF Palatino Bold Italic PALR66W.TTF Palatino Italic PALR46W.TTF Palatino Roman PALR45W.TTF SymbolPS Regular SYMPS__.TTF Times* Bold TIMR65W.TTF Times Bold Italic TIMR66W.TTF Times Italic TIMR46W.TTF Times Roman TIMR45W.TTF Univers Bold UNVR65W.TTF Univers Bold Italic UNVR66W.TTF Univers Condensed Bold UNVR67W.TTF Univers Condensed Bold Italic UNVR68W.TTF Univers Condensed Medium UNVR57W.TTF Univers Condensed Medium Italic UNVR58W.TTF Univers Medium UNVR55W.TTF Univers Medium Italic UNVR56W.TTF Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD. Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts 52 Font name Font style File name Albertus MT Regular PS_12639.TTF Albertus MT Italic PS_12640.TTF Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW ENWW Font name Font style File name Albertus MT Lt Regular PS_14530.TTF Antique Olive CompactPS Regular PS_11120.TTF Antique Olive Roman Regular PS_11119.TTF Antique Olive Roman Bold PS_11118.TTF Antique Olive Roman Italic PS_11846.TTF Apple Chancery Italic PS_24516.TTF Bodoni Poster Regular PS_12704.TTF Bodoni PosterCompressed Regular PS_14508.TTF BodoniPS Regular PS_12581.TTF BodoniPS Bold PS_12585.TTF BodoniPS Bold Italic PS_12586.TTF BodoniPS Italic PS_12582.TTF Candid Regular PS_24517.TTF Chicago Regular PS_24518.TTF Clarendon Light Regular PS_14513.TTF ClarendonPS Regular PS_10269.TTF ClarendonPS Bold PS_12968.TTF Cooper Black Regular PS_10369.TTF Cooper Black Italic PS_10370.TTF Copperplate32bc Regular PS_14514.TTF Copperplate33bc Regular PS_14515.TTF CoronetPS Italic PS_10249.TTF Eurostile Regular PS_10267.TTF Eurostile Bold Regular PS_10268.TTF Eurostile ExtendedTwo Bold PS_14512.TTF Eurostile ExtendedTwo Regular PS_14511.TTF Geneva Regular PS_24509.TTF GillSans Regular PS_13872.TTF GillSans Bold PS_13874.TTF GillSans Bold Italic PS_13875.TTF GillSans Condensed Regular PS_14053.TTF GillSans Condensed Bold PS_14054.TTF GillSans ExtraBold Regular PS_14051.TTF GillSans Italic PS_13873.TTF Font support MS Windows install Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued) 53 Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued) MS Windows install 54 Font name Font style File name GillSans Light Italic PS_13871.TTF GillSans Light Regular PS_13870.TTF Goudy Bold PS_12544.TTF Goudy Bold Italic PS_10695.TTF Goudy Regular PS_12542.TTF Goudy ExtraBold Regular PS_12545.TTF Goudy Italic PS_12543.TTF Helvetica Condensed Regular PS_14526.TTF Helvetica Condensed Bold PS_14528.TTF Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic PS_14529.TTF Helvetica Condensed Italic PS_14527.TTF Hoefler Text Regular PS_24519.TTF Hoefler Text Black Regular PS_24521.TTF Hoefler Text Black Italic PS_24522.TTF Hoefler Text Italic PS_24520.TTF Hoefler Text Ornaments Regular PS_24523.TTF Joanna MT Regular PS_14503.TTF Joanna MT Bold PS_14505.TTF Joanna MT Bold Italic PS_14506.TTF Joanna MT Italic PS_14504.TTF Letter Gothic Italic PS_13778.TTF Letter GothicPS Regular PS_13777.TTF Letter GothicPS Bold PS_13779.TTF Letter GothicPS Bold Italic PS_13780.TTF Lubalin Graph Regular PS_12675.TTF Lubalin Graph Bold PS_12677.TTF Lubalin Graph Bold Italic PS_12625.TTF Lubalin Graph Italic PS_12623.TTF MarigoldPS Regular PS_94073.TTF Mona Lisa Recut Regular PS_14525.TTF Monaco Regular PS_24524.TTF New York Regular PS_24510.TTF Optima Regular PS_12506.TTF Optima Bold PS_12510.TTF Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW ENWW Font name Font style File name Optima Bold Italic PS_12511.TTF Optima Italic PS_12507.TTF Oxford Italic PS_14072.TTF StempelGaramond Roman Italic PS_11546.TTF StempelGaramond Roman Regular PS_11545.TTF StempelGaramond Roman Bold PS_11547.TTF StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic PS_11548.TTF Taffy Regular PS_14507.TTF Univers 45 Light Regular PS_13501.TTF Univers 45 Light Bold PS_14023.TTF Univers 45 Light Bold Italic PS_14024.TTF Univers 45 Light Italic PS_13502.TTF Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold PS_14030.TTF Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold Italic PS_14040.TTF Univers 55 Regular PS_14021.TTF Univers 55 Italic PS_14022.TTF Univers 57 Condensed Regular PS_14029.TTF Univers 57 Condensed Italic PS_14039.TTF Univers ExtendedPS Bold PS_13548.TTF Univers ExtendedPS Regular PS_13547.TTF Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic PS_14481.TTF Univers ExtendedPS Italic PS_14480.TTF Font support MS Windows install Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued) 55 Print-driver install instructions Topics: ● General MS Windows install instructions ● Detailed MS Windows install instructions ● Set a default printer General MS Windows install instructions Installation is similar for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating systems. The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. NOTE The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and the PS Emulation Driver are available on the printing-system software CD. If the HP LaserJet 5200 printer is connected through a file or print server, the printing-system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication and some driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems. MS Windows install For Windows 2000, and Windows XP, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the software. When the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system. Topics: ● Install from the printing-system CD ● Install from a network or from downloaded files Install from the printing-system CD Follow these instructions to install the HP LaserJet 5200 printing system from the CD that came with the device. 1. Quit all software programs. 2. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive. NOTE If the CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD. 3. 56 Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts. Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW Install from a network or from downloaded files Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printingsystem files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing-system software file. 1. Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file. 2. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file. 3. Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the device is installed. For detailed installation instructions, see Detailed MS Windows install instructions. Detailed MS Windows install instructions A series of dialog boxes appear during installation of the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software in MS Windows environments. ● Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons ● Modify a pre-existing installation ● Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port ● Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence ● Install print drivers by using Add Printer ● Installer Customization Wizard for Windows ● Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 MS Windows install Topics: Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions for and explanations about the installation process. Click the Back button on any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box. The specific dialog box depends on your previous selections. Select any options on a given screen and click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the installation sequence. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 57 To exit the installation sequence without installing the device, follow these steps from any dialog box where the Cancel button appears. 1. Click Cancel. A dialog box opens that prompts you with this question: “Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?” Figure 3-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box 2. Click Yes. The Cancel dialog box opens, stating that the setup was interrupted. MS Windows install Figure 3-2 Cancel dialog box 3. Click Finish to close the installation screens. Modify a pre-existing installation If an HP LaserJet 5200 printer has been previously installed, the appearance of the main install screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install-printer setting changes to modify installation. A preexisting installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are presented, depending on the selections that are made. Direct-connect installation through a USB or parallel port The printing-system software should be installed before the HP LaserJet 5200 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation process, the software will prompt you to connect the device during installation. 58 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW Basic, Full, and Custom Installation dialog box sequence NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this document appear in the Windows XP Professional installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems. The Full Installation includes the following components: ● HP LaserJet 5200 PCL 6 Driver ● Screen Fonts ● Install Notes ● User Guide MS Windows install When you select the Install Printer option from the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD, the Language Selection dialog box appears. Figure 3-3 Language Selection dialog box NOTE The Language Selection dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD. The installer automatically detects the language that the computer system uses and presents this selection as the default. Select any other language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the drop-down menu. Click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Welcome dialog box appears. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 59 Figure 3-4 Welcome to the HP LaserJet 5200 Setup Wizard dialog box MS Windows install NOTE The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not support the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. If you try to install the printer in a Windows NT 4.0 environment, the following screen appears. Figure 3-5 Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System When installing the device on a supported operating system, click Next on the Welcome screen to continue the installation. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. 60 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW Figure 3-6 Software License Agreement dialog box MS Windows install The I disagree option is selected by default. Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and then click Next to proceed with the installation. The Printer Connection dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-7 Printer Connection dialog box NOTE The HP LaserJet 5200 printer does not support infrared connections. If you click USB Cable (a "direct connection" using a USB 2.0 cable), and then click Next, the Installation Type dialog box opens. This is the default option. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 61 If you click Parallel Cable (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable), and then click Next, the Installation Type dialog box opens. To continue with the default installation sequence, see Figure 3-20 Installation Type dialog box. NOTE The printing-system software should be installed before the HP LaserJet 5200 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on. During the installation process, the software will prompt you to connect the device during installation. If you are installing the HP LaserJet 5200 printer over the network, click Wired Networking in the Printer Connection dialog box. For a network installation, the HP LaserJet 5200 printer must be connected to the network and turned on before the printing-system software is installed so that the software can detect the printer. NOTE For wireless installation instructions using an HP Jetdirect ew2400 802.11g Wireless Print Server or an HP Direct 380x802.11B wireless print server, consult the documentation that comes with the print server. Click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. MS Windows install Figure 3-8 Searching dialog box NOTE If you are installing the device over a network, you must let the search for the first subnet in the network finish in order to find all available printers. After the first subnet is scanned for available HP LaserJet 5200 printers, the results appear in the Printers Found dialog box. However, the installer continues to search the network for additional printers after the first results appear. The results of searching the first subnet usually takes place within about 20 seconds. It might take some time for the installer to search the other subnets and for the full list of printers to appear in the Printers Found dialog box (see Figure 3-11 Printers Found dialog box), depending on the configuration of the network. 62 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW NOTE The installation process includes the option of using the TCP/IP address for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer, which might be preferable to waiting for the installer to finish the search. MS Windows install If the network has a firewall that is blocking the installation, the Firewall Detected dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-9 Firewall Detected dialog box If you are performing a network installation and no printer is found, the Printer Not Found dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 63 Figure 3-10 Printer Not Found dialog box MS Windows install The device might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the printer is connected and is turned on. If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a port through the firewall, click Next. The Searching dialog box appears (see Figure 3-8 Searching dialog box). If a printer is found, the Printers Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching devices that have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure. 64 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW MS Windows install Figure 3-11 Printers Found dialog box Select the printer that you want to install and click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 3-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box). If the printer is that you want to install is not listed and you want the installer to continue searching network subnet masks, click Search Again…. The Check Printer Connection screen appears (see Figure 3-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box). Select a search option and click Next to perform another search. If the printer that you want to install is not listed and you know its TCP/IP address, click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens. See Figure 3-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box and follow the instructions for changing the TCP/IP address. If a single printer is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, with a list of matching devices that have been found on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 65 Figure 3-12 Printer Found dialog box MS Windows install If you click No, I want to install a different printer and then click Next, the Check Printer Connection dialog box opens, advising you to make sure the cable is properly connected, and giving you the option of searching again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address (see Figure 3-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box). If you click Yes, install this printer and then click Next, the Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box 66 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW In the Confirm Network Settings dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 3-20 Installation Type dialog box). If you click Change Settings…, the Confirm Change Setting dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. MS Windows install WARNING! When you change the TCP/IP configuration by using the Change Settings button, you change the actual settings in the device Jetdirect card. You should make changes to these settings only with the advice of your network administrator. Figure 3-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box If you click No, the Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 3-20 Installation Type dialog box). If you click Yes, the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 3-19 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box). The Check Printer Connection dialog box, which appears if you selected No, I want to install a different printer in the Printer Found dialog box or if the system failed to detect the device over the network, is shown in the following figure. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 67 Figure 3-15 Check Printer Connection dialog box MS Windows install If you click Search again for all available printers and then click Next, the Searching dialog box opens (see Figure 3-8 Searching dialog box). If you click Specify Printer by address and then click Next, the Specify Printer dialog box opens. The Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure. If you click Enter settings for a printer not on the network and then click Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 3-17 Printer Settings dialog box). Figure 3-16 Specify Printer dialog box 68 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW You can specify a printer by clicking one of the following options and typing in the required information: ● Hardware Address (MAC) ● IP Address ● IP Hostname When you click Next, the Searching dialog box opens. When the search is finished, the Printer Found dialog box opens (see Figure 3-11 Printers Found dialog box). MS Windows install If you clicked Enter settings for a printer not on the network in the Check Printer Connection dialog box and then clicked Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-17 Printer Settings dialog box To install the printer by using the hardware address, click Hardware Address (MAC), type the device hardware address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. To install the printer using the TCP/IP address, click IP Address, type the device TCP/IP address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 69 Figure 3-18 Set Port Name dialog box MS Windows install Type a port name in the Port Name: field and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box (see Figure 3-20 Installation Type dialog box). Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Installation Type dialog box opens (see Figure 3-20 Installation Type dialog box). NOTE If you selected Yes in the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box (see Figure 3-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box), the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. 70 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW If you make a change in the IP Address:, Subnet Mask:, or Gateway: fields (without clicking Next) and then click Suggest Settings…, the fields refresh with information that was found by the installer and reported in the Printer Found screen. Type a different TCP/IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Gateway address and then click Next to open the Confirm Network Settings dialog box (see Figure 3-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box). If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next, the Set Port Name dialog box opens (see Figure 3-18 Set Port Name dialog box). Figure 3-20 Installation Type dialog box ENWW Print-driver install instructions 71 MS Windows install Figure 3-19 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box NOTE The components of a Full Installation might vary from device to device. Click Basic Installation to install only the HP PCL 6 Unidriver (Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003) or the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver (Windows 98 and Windows Me) screen fonts. If you click Basic Installation and then click Next, the Ready to Install dialog box opens (see Figure 3-25 Ready to Install dialog box ). If you select Custom Installation and then click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure. MS Windows install Figure 3-21 Drivers dialog box An empty check box indicates that the feature is not installed. A check mark appears when you select an install state for that feature. Information about the space required and the space available on your hard drive appears in the dialog box. Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection. It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you are not installing a driver). Click Next to proceed with the installation. The Additional Software dialog box opens. To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears. 72 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW MS Windows install Figure 3-22 Driver Details dialog box All the drivers that are available in the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Drivers dialog box. In the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box appears. Figure 3-23 Additional Software dialog box ENWW Print-driver install instructions 73 To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box appears. MS Windows install Figure 3-24 Additional software Details dialog box All the software that is available in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box. Click Next to open the Ready to Install dialog box. 74 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW Figure 3-25 Ready to Install dialog box MS Windows install Click Install to start the installation process. Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs: ENWW ● General ● Sharing Print-driver install instructions 75 MS Windows install Figure 3-26 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field. Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank. If you want to use the HP LaserJet 5200 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer as the default printer for Windows-based programs check box. Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over a network. 76 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click the Shared as: option and type the printer name in the text field. NOTE When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share the printer on Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by clicking Shared as, you must type a name. You can also provide additional print driver support for other operating systems. If you click Shared as in the Sharing tab of the Printer Properties dialog box, the text box becomes available. Type the share name and then click Next. The Ready to Install dialog box opens. NOTE To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7 characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single pagedescription language (PDL), or 72 characters for multiple PDLs. If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears. If you are installing the printer in a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or a Windows Server 2003 operating environment and you want to install additional drivers for Windows 98 or Windows Me, click Additional Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 77 MS Windows install Figure 3-27 Printer Properties Sharing tab Figure 3-28 Additional Drivers dialog box MS Windows install NOTE If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you are using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK. The Additional Drivers dialog box does not appear if the computer is running Windows 98 or Windows Me. In the Ready to Install dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printingsystem software folders and files. The Installing HP LaserJet 5200 dialog box is shown in the following figure. 78 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills. Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software. At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked. When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 79 MS Windows install Figure 3-29 Installing dialog box MS Windows install Figure 3-30 Finish dialog box Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard. NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish. The HP LaserJet 5200 Next Steps dialog box appears. 80 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW MS Windows install Figure 3-31 HP LaserJet 5200 Next Steps dialog box To verify that the printer is connected, click Print Driver Test Page. Figure 3-32 Test Page dialog box If the test page prints correctly, click OK to continue. If it does not print, open the printer properties tab and try to print another test page. If you have access to the Internet, you can register your device online. In the Congratulations dialog box, click Register Product to open the HP Registration Web site. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 81 MS Windows install Figure 3-33 HP Registration screen Install print drivers by using Add Printer Use the following steps to install the print drivers by using the MS Windows Add Printer tool: 1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive. 2. Go to the Add a printer feature in MS Windows. In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. The Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears. In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears. 3. 82 Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the printer. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process. Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW If the computer is running a 64-bit MS Windows operating system, you must install the corresponding 64-bit print driver. The 64-bit print drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to install a print driver by using the Add Printer feature. 1. Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive. 2. Click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers and Faxes, and then click Add a printer. The Add a printer wizard screen appears. 3. Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the device. The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process. 4. Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the print-driver files on the software CD, as shown in the following lists: Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 ● To install the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, select the following file: \Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL6\hpc5200c.inf ● To install the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, select the following file: \Drivers\(your operating system)\PCL5\hpc5200b.inf To install the PS Emulation Unidriver, select the following file: MS Windows install ● \Drivers\(your operating system)\PS\hpc5200d.inf Windows 98 or Windows Me ● To install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, select the following file: Drivers\<language>\pcl6\hp3dusb.inf (for a USB connection) Drivers\<language>\pcl6\hp5200p6.inf (for a network connection) ● To install theHP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, select the following file: Drivers\<language>\pcl5\hp3dusb.inf (for a USB connection) Drivers\<language>\pcl5\hp5200p5.inf (for a network connection) ● To install the PS Emulation Driver, select the following file: Drivers\<language>\ps\usbprint.inf (for a USB connection) Drivers\<language>\pcl6\hp5200f.inf (for a network connection) 5. Complete the wizard steps. The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process. Installer Customization Wizard for Windows Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard option to customize the HP LaserJet 5200 installer by pre-setting the installation options in a response file. To start the utility, click installer ENWW Print-driver install instructions 83 customization wizard on the main menu of the software CD browser. Using this option, administrators can create a silent (unattended) installer that is customized with any of the following selections: ● Language ● Operating system ● Print drivers ● Components NOTE For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the HP Device Installer Customization Wizard, which is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/lj5200 Topics: ● Run the Installer Customization Wizard ● Dialogs ● Distribution Run the Installer Customization Wizard MS Windows install The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the CD. It can be started from the CD browser, depending on device-specific instantiation. It runs separately from the common Microsoft Installer (MSI), with its own interface. Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file (RESPONSE.INI) for a single system installation. The installation package might work for multiple systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be directly edited for system-configuration differences. The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/lj5200 To run the Installer Customization Wizard 1. Insert the HP LaserJet 5200 software CD in the CD-ROM drive. 2. In the CD browser main screen, click Installer Customization Wizard. To complete the installation, follow the instructions in the dialog boxes. Dialogs The Language Selection dialog box appears. 84 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW Figure 3-34 Language Selection dialog box MS Windows install Select a language and click OK. The Welcome dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-35 Welcome to the HP LaserJet 5200 Installation Customization Wizard screen Click Next in the Welcome to the HP LaserJet 5200 Installation Customization Wizard dialog box. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 85 MS Windows install Figure 3-36 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box To cancel the installation, click Cancel on this or any other screen where it appears (see Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons). Read the software-license agreement, click I agree, and then click Next to open the Language dialog box. 86 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the device to the language that is selected in the Language dialog box. Maintenance mode on systems where installation has been completed by using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the language. To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard installation, the customized installation must be uninstalled, and a new device must be installed in order to restore the option to install other languages. The language that you selected is installed on users' computers regardless of the language of the text in the dialog boxes (as specified in the Language Selection dialog box earlier). The Language dialog box defaults to the language that was selected in the Language Selection dialog box, but any language that is available on the CD can be selected for the customized installer. The language selection is recorded in the response file. Click Next to open the Printer Port dialog box, as shown in the following figure. Click Back on this or any screen where it appears to return to a previous screen. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 87 MS Windows install Figure 3-37 Language dialog box MS Windows install Figure 3-38 Printer Port dialog box Click Network Path to make the text field available for a queue name entry. If you click Network Path and click the Browse, the Browse for Printer dialog box opens. Figure 3-39 Browse for Printer dialog box 88 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW Navigate to a printer and click OK to record the path in the Network Path field in the Printer Port dialog box. Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box. Select Local Port and then click Next to open the Connector Type dialog box. The Connector Type dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support. It also includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where it will be used. MS Windows install In the Printer Port dialog box, click Local (direct connect) port and then click Next to open the Printer Connection dialog box. The Printer Connection dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless of local support. Figure 3-40 Printer Connection dialog box Click the type of connection that you are using and then click Next to open the Drivers dialog box. See Figure 3-43 Drivers dialog box. In the Printer Port dialog box, click New TCP/IP Port and then click Next to open the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box. The Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be created identically on the system where it will be used. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 89 MS Windows install Figure 3-41 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box Click IP Address to make the field available for typing the TCP/IP address for the printer. Only numerals are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one digit in the IP Address field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP address. Click IP Hostname to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the printer. Any characters are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid IP hostname. Click Hardware Address to make the field available for typing the hardware address of the printer. It accepts any characters but limits the entry to 12 characters. If this option is selected, you must type at least one character in the Hardware Address: field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting you for a valid hardware address. After you select any the options, type the appropriate name or address, and then click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens (see Figure 3-43 Drivers dialog box). For each of the options in the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box, you can either use the default port name (as specified in each of the three options) or specify a different name. If you click Use Default and click Next, the Drivers dialog box opens. See Figure 3-43 Drivers dialog box. To specify a different name, click Specify: and click Next to open the Port Creation Options dialog box. 90 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW Click No, do no create the port (the printer will not be installed) if you do not want to create a port. Click Yes, create the port and click Next to open the Drivers dialog box, as shown in the following figure. If the printer cannot be found, type the printer hardware address in the Hardware Address field and click Next. NOTE To print a configuration page where the printer hardware address is listed, see Determining the current level of firmware . ENWW Print-driver install instructions 91 MS Windows install Figure 3-42 Port Creation Options dialog box MS Windows install Figure 3-43 Drivers dialog box Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other selection. It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver. Select the drivers you want to install (or select none of them if you are not installing a driver). To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears. 92 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW MS Windows install Figure 3-44 Driver Details dialog box All the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Drivers dialog box. On the Drivers dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Additional Software dialog box appears. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 93 MS Windows install Figure 3-45 Additional Software dialog box To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog box appears. 94 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW MS Windows install Figure 3-46 Additional software Details dialog box All the software that you selected in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box. In the Additional Software dialog box, click Next to open the Custom Installer Location dialog box, which is shown in the following figure. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 95 MS Windows install Figure 3-47 Custom Installer Location dialog box Use the Location: text field to type a description of the physical location of the printer. The field is large, but is limited as to the number of characters that it can accommodate. To change the physical location of the printer, click Browse…, navigate to the folder that you want, and click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box. Click Next to open the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure. 96 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW MS Windows install Figure 3-48 Ready to Create Installer dialog box NOTE The location for the installer package defaults to c:\<name of printer>. NOTE During installation, several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the directory that appears in the Location field. Be sure that enough space is available on the directory before continuing. Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box. This dialog box has two tabs: ENWW ● General ● Sharing Print-driver install instructions 97 Figure 3-49 Printer Properties General tab MS Windows install On the General tab, you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name: field. Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the printer. You can also leave these fields blank. If you want to use the HP LaserJet 5200 printer as your default printer, select the Use the printer as the default printer for MS Windows-based programs check box. Click OK to return to the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over a network. The Sharing tab is shown in the following figure. 98 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW On the Sharing tab, Not Shared is the default setting. To share the printer, click Shared as: and type the printer name in the text field. NOTE To allow sharing across all operating systems, the share name should not exceed 7 characters. The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single pagedescription language (PDL), or 72 characters for multiple PDLs. If you want to select additional drivers to support automatic driver downloads, click Additional Drivers. The Additional Drivers dialog box appears. Figure 3-51 Additional Drivers dialog box If you want to support automatic driver downloads to clients from the computer that you are using to install the printer, select the Windows 98 and Me check box and click OK. ENWW Print-driver install instructions 99 MS Windows install Figure 3-50 Printer Properties Sharing tab In the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printing-system software folders and files. The Installing dialog box is shown in the following figure. MS Windows install Figure 3-52 Installing dialog box This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills. Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without installing the printing-system software. At a certain point, the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked. When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure. 100 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW MS Windows install Figure 3-53 Finish dialog box Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard. NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options, you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish. Distribution The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the CD, except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the features and options that you selected. The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user interaction. This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the installation without being prompted. You can perform the silent installation in two ways: ● Customized silent installer ● Command-line silent installer The response file can be renamed, but it must be in the root directory of the installer package. The name cannot contain spaces; spaces prevent the SETUP.EXE file from passing to the installer package. The end-user cannot customize the command-line silent installer. It installs the printing-system components that are included in the Full Installation. The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file, is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/lj5200 ENWW Print-driver install instructions 101 Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function when you cannot see the device on the network. Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver. This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft. Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a function of the MS Windows operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP support only Intel X86 processor types. To install the print driver on a Windows 2000,Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating system, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows 2000 print driver on the Windows 2000 server, you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows 2000 Printer .INF file must contain the same device name as the Windows 98 or Windows Me printer .INF file. MS Windows install Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Windows 98 or Windows Me PS Driver V4.0 or later. In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers are running in the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server. However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver that is different from the one on the print server. In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode processes. Usermode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal end-user processes and software programs. A user-mode print driver that functions incorrectly can terminate (or “crash”) only the process in which it is running—not the whole operating system. Because access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased. www.techweb.boi.hp.com Set a default printer This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. 1. In Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP Home). 102 2. Right-click the device that you want to set as the default printer. 3. Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option. Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing-system components ENWW 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Introduction This document describes the features of the traditional print drivers for the HP LaserJet 5200 in Windows 98 and Windows Me. NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers in various operating systems, see Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems. You can control print jobs from several places: ● the device control panel ● the software program print dialog box ● the driver user interface When you install the print drivers by using the printing-system installer in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. You can install the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver by performing a Custom Installation. NOTE Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP LaserJet 5200 print drivers, but you can use print drivers for legacy HP devices whose feature sets closely match the HP LaserJet 5200 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP LaserJet 2400-series drivers, but some print-driver features might be missing and print quality might be compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver that is supplied for the device. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer installation method to install the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. This document describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Properties print-driver interface for Windows 98 and Windows Me. This document also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. Topics: ● ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me Introduction 103 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override device control-panel settings. ● Help system ● Finishing tab features ● Effects tab features ● Paper tab features ● Job Storage tab features ● Basics tab features ● Configure tab features ● HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 104 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways: ● Device control panel ● Software-program print-dialog box ● Print-driver user interface Device control panel For information about controlling print jobs from the device control panel, see the HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide that came with the device, or download it from following Web site: www.hp.com/go/lj5200_software Software-program print-dialog box To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps: 1. Click File. 2. Click Print. 3. Click Properties. The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open. Print-driver user interface 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me: ENWW ● General tab ● Details tab ● Color Management tab ● Sharing tab ● Finishing tab ● Effects tab Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me 105 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows To gain access to the print-driver user interface in Windows 98 and Windows Me, follow these steps: ● Paper tab ● Job Storage tab ● Basics tab ● Configure tab Only device-specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR; the other driver tabs are part of the operating system. The following tabs are described: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Job Storage NOTE The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage Enable setting is selected on the tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the Configure tab. ● Configure ● Basics ● Configure HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 106 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Help system The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options. Topics: ● What's this? Help ● Context-sensitive Help ● Incompatible Options messages ● Bubble Help What's this? Help Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways: ● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears. ● Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears. ● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears. Context-sensitive Help When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears. Incompatible Options settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the device capabilities or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency, a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict. NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the device to perform. Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the device documentation to ensure that the device has the expected capabilities. Figure 4-1 A typical constraint message with an OK button ENWW Help system 107 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Incompatible Options messages Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK and Cancel buttons, the interpretation of the buttons is as follows: ● Click OK to accept the change that was just made. The driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value. ● Click Cancel to reject the change that was just made. The control returns to its previous value. Bubble Help Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in it, representing the international symbol for information. The following figure shows a Bubble Help icon on a driver tab. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-2 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable, although it can also accompany an available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help. Moving the pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable. 108 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution that you should be aware of when using that particular feature. ENWW Help system 109 Finishing tab features To gain access to the Finishing tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Finishing tab. Use the Finishing tab to print on both sides of the page, to control the printed output on the page, and to print booklets. The following figure shows the Finishing tab. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-3 The default Finishing tab 110 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The Finishing tab contains the following controls: ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Document Options ● Document preview image ● Print Quality Print Task Quick Sets The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the tab affects the Print Task Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Properties driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick Sets settings: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Job Storage ● Basics Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save more, a message box appears that contains the following message: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones. The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu: ● Default Print Settings ● User Guide Print Settings Default Print Settings When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored. ENWW Finishing tab features 111 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Properties driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. The Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it in the drop-down menu and click Delete. The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See HP Driver Preconfiguration for information about preconfigurable driver settings. Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 112 Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets for Default values Preconfigurable1 Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group box Available, not selected Yes Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, not selected Yes Booklet Printing Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, Off Yes Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options group box 1 Yes Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Print Quality Finishing tab, Print Quality group box Default Yes Current Setting Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) This is the “Default” setting Raster Compression (HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver only) Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) Automatic Rendering Mode (HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver only) Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) Automatic Send TrueType as Bitmaps Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) Available, not selected Output Settings Finishing tab, Print Quality Details dialog box (Click Details on Finishing tab.) Scale Patterns (WYSIWIG) selected Print Document On Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Off; print on the size that is specified on the Paper tab Yes Size to print on Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Actual size specified on the Paper tab Yes2 Scale to Fit Effects tab, Fit to Page group box Unavailable, selected Yes Watermarks Effects tab, Watermarks dialog box (none) Yes First Page Only (watermark) Effects tab, Watermark dialog box Unavailable Yes Current Watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) (none) Yes2 Watermark Message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) (none) Yes2 Message Angle (watermark) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) Diagonal Yes2 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Yes ENWW ENWW Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets for Default values Preconfigurable1 Watermark message angle (angle) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) Unavailable unless Angle option is selected, 52 degrees Yes Name (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Arial Yes2 Color (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Gray Yes Shading (watermark font ) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Very Light Yes2 Size (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box 80 No Style (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Regular Yes Use Different Paper/ Covers Paper tab, Paper Options group box Off (All of the pages use the same media.) No Size is: Paper tab, Paper Options group box Letter Yes Source is: Paper tab, Paper Options group box Automatically Select Yes Type is: Paper tab, Paper Options group box Unspecified Yes Unlabeled group box Job Storage tab Status message about the destination of the job No Job Storage Mode Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Off No Proof and Hold Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Private Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Quick Copy Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Stored Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Require PIN to print option Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, not selected No PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, blank MS Windows User Name Job Storage tab, User Name group box Unavailable, selected No Job Name Job Storage tab, Job Name group box Unavailable, Automatic selected No Display Job ID when printing Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options group box Unavailable No Copy Basics tab, Copies group box 1 Yes Orientation Basics tab, Orientation group box Portrait Yes Finishing tab features HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer (continued) 113 Table 4-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer (continued) Driver feature Feature setting location U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets for Default values Preconfigurable1 Landscape Basics tab, Orientation group box Available, not selected Yes Rotate by 180 degrees Basics tab, Orientation group box Available, not selected Yes 1 2 Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools. For more information, see HP Driver Preconfiguration, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw. Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me. User Guide Print Settings The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide. When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings: ● Print on Both Sides is set to ON ● Flip Pages Up is set to ON ● Booklet Printing is set to OFF and is unavailable ● Pages per Sheet is set to 2 ● Page Order is set to Right then Down Document Options The Document Options group box contains the following controls: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● Correct Order for Rear Bin ● Print on Both Sides ● Flip Pages Up ● Booklet Printing ● Pages per Sheet ● Print Page Borders ● Page Order Correct Order for Rear Bin The HP LaserJet 5200 has a door in the back that can be opened to make the paper go straight out the back of the printer. Use this bin or slot to minimize curl and avoid jams with heavier paper, such as cardstock. You may also need to feed the paper from the multipurpose tray for best results. The paper is delivered printed side up. Use this feature to order your pages correctly for this bin or slot. If you click this check box and also click Print on Both Sides, the printer prints the first side of each page, pauses for you to reload the paper, and then prints the second side of each page. Other documents cannot be printed while the printer is paused. Follow the onscreen instructions. 114 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Print on Both Sides The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist: ● ● Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any of the following media types except for the following types: ● Labels ● Transparency ● Envelope ● Cardstock ● Tough Paper Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes: ● Statement ● Envelope #10 ● Envelope DL ● Envelope C5 ● Envelope B5 ● Envelope Monarch ● Double Japan Postscard Rotated NOTE As a rule, extra memory need not be installed on the HP LaserJet 5200 printer in order to print on both sides. However, very complex double-sided print jobs might require additional memory. ● Letter ● Legal ● A4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available when Paper Size is set to the following media sizes: Topics: ENWW ● Automatically print on both sides ● Manually printing on both sides Finishing tab features 115 Automatically print on both sides The duplexing unit in the device prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models: ● HP LaserJet 5200tn ● HP LaserJet 5200dtn The HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver. The smart duplexing feature is available for all media types, except for those that cannot be printed on both sides and certain others. Media types that are not supported are shown in the following list: ● Labels ● Envelopes ● Transparency ● Prepunched ● Preprinted ● Letterhead When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled. To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings, such as fuser temperature and print speed, to produce the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Manually printing on both sides Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP LaserJet 5200 and HP LaserJet 5200n printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP LaserJet 5200 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media. Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. (The PS Emulation Driver does not support this feature.) If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the device automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, and 8.5 x 13, only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported. To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing, you must click to clear the Duplexing Unit check box on the Configure tab. 116 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side: ● Plain ● Preprinted ● Letterhead ● Prepunched ● Bond ● Recycled ● Colored ● Rough Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode. Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side. To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps: Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box. 2. Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print. 3. When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 1. ENWW Finishing tab features 117 Figure 4-4 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function. Flip Pages Up HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Use the Flip Pages Up check box, which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected, to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not available. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation that is selected on the Basics tab. Table 4-2 Page orientation Orientation (Basics tab) Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected Portrait Short-edge binding Long-edge binding Landscape Long-edge binding Short-edge binding When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together. 118 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar. Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book. Booklet Printing The Booklet Printing drop-down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported media size is selected in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The Booklet Printing drop-down menu offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the Paper tab: ● [paper size] (Left Binding) ● [paper size] (Right Binding) When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding), the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. Booklet printing is disabled when unsupported media sizes (such as envelopes) are selected as the media size, and an incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver. The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist: ● Print on Both Sides (on the Finishing tab) is selected. ● % of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100. ● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is 1. ● Size is: (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4. Topics: ● Book and Booklet Printing ● Print a booklet Book and Booklet Printing The HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports both book and booklet printing. A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box) to select the following printing options for the book: ENWW ● Front Cover ● First Page ● Other Pages Finishing tab features 119 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet Printing to tell you why it is disabled. ● Last Page ● Back Cover A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings. Print a booklet Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs. 1. In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Finishing tab. 3. Select the Print on Both Sides check box. 4. In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Letter [Left binding]). 5. Click OK in the print driver. 6. Click OK in the print dialog box to print. Pages per Sheet Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six settings: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● 1 page per sheet (default) ● 2 pages per sheet ● 4 pages per sheet ● 6 pages per sheet ● 9 pages per sheet ● 16 pages per sheet When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable. Print Page Borders Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1. Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page. 120 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Page Order The Page Order drop-down menu contains the following selections: ● Right, then Down ● Down, then Right ● Left, then Down ● Down, then Left The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure. Figure 4-5 Page-order preview images ● 2 pages per sheet ● 4 pages per sheet ● 6 pages per sheet ● 9 pages per sheet ● 16 pages per sheet The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Basics Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse cursor over the document preview image, the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units. ENWW Finishing tab features 121 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Document preview image Print Quality The HP LaserJet 5200 print-driver Print Quality group box provides options that control output settings and font settings. The following options are available in the Print Quality group box: The Print Quality Details dialog box opens. The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options, depending on the driver that you are using. Changing resolution might change the formatting of the printed document. ● Best Quality setting ● Faster Printing setting ● Economode check box ● Details button Best Quality Select this option to print documents at the optimal resolution of the printer. This option provides the best quality. Faster Printing Select this option to print faster than with the Best Quality setting, but with slightly lower quality. This setting uses 300 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and 600 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following figure. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-6 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver The following options are available: ● 122 Current Setting Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW ● Font Settings ● Output Settings Current Setting The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes to reflect the current print-quality setting: ● This is the “Best Quality” setting ● This is the “Faster Printing” setting ● This is a “Custom” setting Font Settings In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts. Output Settings ● ProRes 1200 (170 lpi) ● ProRes 1200 (141 lpi) ● FastRes 1200 ● 600 dpi ● Resolution. The options are: ● ● ProRes 1200 (170 lpi) ● ProRes 1200 (141 lpi) (default) ● FastRes 1200. This is the default setting. ● 600 dpi NOTE When a “ProRes” setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on a “FastRes” setting. The “FastRes” setting emulates 1200-dpi printing, but places fewer dots on the page and uses less toner, and printing speed is faster than for documents printed on a “ProRes” setting. The Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) feature is enabled by default. The options are On or Off (rather than the “Light,” “Medium,” “Dark,” or “Off” settings in some print drivers). The On setting corresponds to the “Medium” setting found in other HP printer drivers. ENWW Finishing tab features 123 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings: ● Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default. ● The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic. ● Edge-to-Edge Printing. Select this check box to allow near edge-to-edge printing on the media size specified. For example, to achieve “edge-to-edge” printing for Letter-size media, use a largerthan-letter-size media, select the Edge-to-Edge Printing option, and trim the margin so that the printed image extends to the edge of the page. Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver as shown in the following figure. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver The following options are available: 124 ● Current Setting ● Graphic Settings ● Font Settings ● Output Settings Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Current Setting The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver. When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box, the setting changes from the setting on the Finishing tab (for instance, This is the “Best Quality” setting [the default setting] or This is the “Faster Printing” setting) to This is a "Custom" setting. Graphic Settings The Graphics Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver has settings for the graphics rendering mode. The following Rendering Mode: options are available: ● Automatic. This is the default setting. ● Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the printer as a combination of HP Graphics Language, V2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higherquality output. ● Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases. ● Send Page as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the printer as images composed of individual dots. Use Send Page as Raster if you are experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the Send TrueType as Bitmaps option has no effect. Font Settings In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected (clear) by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts. The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings: ● ENWW Resolution. The options are: ● 600 dpi (default) ● 300 dpi ● The Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) feature is enabled by default. The options are On or Off (rather than the “Light,” “Medium,” “Dark,” or “Off” settings in some print drivers). The On setting corresponds to the “Medium” setting found in other HP printer drivers. ● Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is selected by default. ● The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default. When the feature is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse Finishing tab features 125 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Output Settings typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic. ● Edge-to-Edge Printing. Select this check box to allow near edge-to-edge printing on the media size specified. For example, to achieve “edge-to-edge” printing for Letter-size media, use a largerthan-letter-size media, select the Edge-to-Edge Printing option, and trim the margin so that the printed image extends to the edge of the page. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 126 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Effects tab features To gain access to the Effects tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Effects tab. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab. Figure 4-8 Effects tab ENWW Effects tab features 127 The Effects tab contains the following controls: ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Fit To Page ● Document preview image ● Watermarks Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. Fit To Page The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls: ● Print Document On ● Scale to Fit ● % of Normal Size Print Document On Use Print Document On to format the document for one media size, and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size. The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions: ● % of Normal Size is not 100. ● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom size that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media size. Scale to Fit The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On option selected and the target size specified as Letter. 128 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Figure 4-9 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size. % of Normal Size The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer. The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected). Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview. You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into the entry box. The following settings disable % of Normal Size: ● Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected. ● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1. Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs: ENWW ● Finishing ● Effects Effects tab features 129 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%. ● Paper ● Basics Watermarks Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The Watermarks group box contains the following controls: ● Current Watermarks ● First Page Only ● Edit… Current Watermarks The following watermarks are preset in the driver: ● (none) ● Confidential ● Draft ● SAMPLE The drop-down menu shows alphabetically-sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the document preview image. First Page Only HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is "(none)". Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page). Edit… Click Edit…, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following figure shows the Watermark Details dialog box. 130 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Figure 4-10 Watermark Details dialog box The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and the font attributes. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls: NOTE This section also contains information about default watermark settings. ● Current Watermarks ● Watermark Message ● Message Angle ● Document preview image ● Font Attributes ● Default watermark settings Current Watermarks The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created. ENWW Effects tab features 131 To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it. To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box. To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available. To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark. Watermark Message The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each in a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on). Message Angle Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page. ● Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page. ● Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric spin box to select the angle. Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box. The document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark Details dialog box. Font Attributes Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font. 132 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls: ● Name The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent. ● Color The Color drop-down menu contains only one option: Gray. ● Shading The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu: ● Lightest ● Very Light (default) ● Light ● Medium Light ● Medium ● Medium Dark ● Dark ● Very Dark ● Darkest ● Size Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent. ● Style The following settings are available: ● Regular ● Bold ● Italic ● Bold Italic The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular. Default watermark settings The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks. ENWW Effects tab features 133 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select Darkest to produce a black watermark. Table 4-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks Setting New watermark Preset watermark Name Arial Varies by language Color Gray Gray Shading Very Light Very Light Size 80 Varies by language Style Regular Regular Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 134 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Paper tab features To gain access to the Paper tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Paper tab. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper tab. Figure 4-11 Paper tab ENWW Paper tab features 135 The Paper tab contains the following controls: ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Paper Options ● Document preview image ● Device image Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. Paper Options The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections available by default. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-12 Paper Options group box (default) The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. For convenience, the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order: ● Size is ● Source is ● Type is ● Use Different Paper/Covers ● Custom Size is The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes. 136 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW NOTE When you move the mouse cursor over the dimensions label, the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units. You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box. When you set the media size in the driver, the entire print-job output uses that media size. That is, if the print job uses Letter-size media, any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options must also use Letter-size media. Because print-driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally best to use the print driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes. NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document. When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the device, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray. For information about media sizes, see Media attributes. When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. Custom The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper/Covers is selected and any setting other than First Page is also selected. Figure 4-13 Custom Paper Size dialog box ENWW Paper tab features 137 When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains one of two things, depending on the current paper-size selection on the Paper tab: ● If the paper-size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains the name of that custom size. ● If the paper-size selection is a standard media size, then the drop-down menu shows the default name Untitled (plus a number sign [#] and a numerical value) for a custom media size. NOTE In Windows 98 and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size media measuring 8.4 inches x 11 inches). The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media-size names, and not against the standard media-size names. The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and capabilities are discussed in the Save, Delete, or Rename section. Name The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently. Use the Name drop-down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes, or to type a new name for a custom media size. The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending on the following conditions: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls in the dialog box have not been changed since, then the Name drop-down menu shows the name of the last selected custom media size. ● If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or if a saved media size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default name of "Untitled." ● If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the drop-down menu until a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu. If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click Save, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved media-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and replaced by the values of the selected custom media size. 138 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Save, Delete, or Rename The dynamic command button located under the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels: Save, Delete, and Rename. ● Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size. Clicking the button causes the name in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names. If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you click Yes, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver returns to the Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom media names, and not against the standard media-size names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button. ● Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom media size appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the dropdown menu or clicking Save. Clicking Delete causes the saved custom media size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled, the height and width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save. ● Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting an existing custom media size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name drop-down menu. The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command button, and the actions that take users from one state to another. State Drop-down menu contents Button label Action Next state 1 Untitled Save Click Save. 3 Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 2 Change the width or height values. 1 Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3 Click Save. 3 Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 2 Change the width or height values. 2 Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3 Click Delete. 1 Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 4 Change the width or height values. 1 Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3 2 3 ENWW <user-typed text> <name of saved item> Save Delete Paper tab features HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Table 4-4 Name drop-down menu text strings 139 Table 4-4 Name drop-down menu text strings (continued) State Drop-down menu contents Button label Action Next state 4 <user-typed text> Rename Click Rename (when the name is unique). 3 Click Rename (when the name is a duplicate). 4 Type something into the Name drop-down menu. 4 Change the width or height values. 2 Select a saved item from the drop-down menu. 3 Custom size (width and height controls) The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by using the up and down arrows. The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height. Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See Custom width and height control limits. If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed. The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values change. Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the dynamic measurement units button (either Use Inches or Use Metric). HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Custom width and height control limits The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet 5200 is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 312 x 470 mm (12.28 x 18.5 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each mediahandling device. Table 4-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose) Width 76 mm (3.0 inches) 312 mm (12.28 inches) Height 127 mm (5.0 inches) 470 mm (18.5 inches) Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 297 mm (11.7 inches) Height 210 mm (8.26 inches) 432 mm (17 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 297 mm (11.7 inches) Height 210 mm (8.26 inches) 432 mm (17 inches) Tray 3 (500-sheet, optional) 140 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Table 4-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued) Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Duplexing unit Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 297 mm (11.7 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 432 mm (17 inches) Dynamic measurement units Use the dynamic measurement units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard (inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The label on this button is dynamic, depending on the measurement units that are in use. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in inches, the button is labeled Use Millimeters. If the custom size currently shows the measurements in millimeters, the button is labeled Use Inches. Click the button to switch measurement-unit types. Close When you click the Close button, the Custom Paper Size dialog box closes according to the logic in the following table. In all cases, any custom media sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted) while the dialog box is open remains in the Size is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button. Table 4-6 Close dialog-box text strings If the drop-down menu contains And the button says Then this happens when you click the Close button Untitled Save The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved. The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the Custom button. <user-typed text> Save The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved. <name of saved item> Delete The dialog box closes, and the current media size is set to the size that last appeared in the drop-down menu. <user-typed text> Rename The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the Custom button. The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the Custom button. Source is The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. ENWW Paper tab features 141 The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the device: ● Automatically select ● Manual Feed in Tray 1 ● Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray) ● Tray 2 (250-sheet tray) ● Tray 3 (optional 500-sheet tray) The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP LaserJet 5200 uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray. Type is The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP LaserJet 5200 supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually Plain. The following standard types appear in the list: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● Unspecified ● Plain ● Preprinted ● Letterhead ● Transparency ● Prepunched ● Labels ● Bond ● Recycled ● Color ● Cardstock 164-200 g/m2 (45–53 lb) ● Rough ● Vellum ● Envelope ● Light 60-75 g/m2 (16–20 lb) ● Tough Paper (Glossy Film) The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting. 142 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the device, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray. Use Different Paper/Covers You can print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with associated options: ● Front Cover ● First Page ● Other Pages ● Last Page ● Back Cover NOTE When you change the Source Is and Type is settings for any of the covers or pages, the settings remain configured until you close the software program from which you are printing. For example, if you select First Page and change the media source or type, and then select Back Cover to change the media source or type, the check mark remains beside Front Cover and the selected source and type settings remain in effect. The settings are cleared only when you close the software program. Front Cover Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the document. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Front Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure. Figure 4-14 Front Cover options ENWW Paper tab features 143 The following are the Front Cover options: ● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. First Page Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. The First Page setting is selected by default. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-15 First Page options The following are the First Page options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. 144 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. Other Pages Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First Page) for the other pages of the document. The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following figure. Figure 4-16 Other Pages options The following are the Other Pages options: ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. Last Page Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a document. The Last Page setting and options are shown in the following figure. ENWW Paper tab features 145 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. Figure 4-17 Last Page options The following are the Last Page options: ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. Back Cover Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document. The Back Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-18 Back Cover setting 146 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The following are the Back Cover options: ● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option. NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. Document preview image ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Basics Device image The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration of the device and corresponds to its configuration data. It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties. On the Paper tab, the device image contains hot spots where you can select a media source. When you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to a gloved hand. The current media source tray, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a device-image hot spot, is highlighted on the printer image. The following points are worth noting: ENWW ● The Automatically Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the device image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the corresponding part in the printer image. ● Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in the Source is: option. Manual Feed in Tray 1, which is available from the Source is: drop-down menu, cannot be selected by selecting the image. ● On the Paper tab, only source trays have device-image hot spots and can be highlighted. Paper tab features 147 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs: Job Storage tab features To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Job Storage tab. NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when at least 80 MB of total memory is installed and configured. Use the job-storage features to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 5200 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections. The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled. To support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features. A minimum total memory of 80 MB is required to use the job-storage features. After additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the device. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers. To configure the drivers manually after installing additional memory, follow these steps: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Configure tab. 7. Under Other Options, click More…. 8. If additional memory has been installed, change the setting in the Total Memory: drop-down menu. If you select at least 80 MB of total installed memory, this also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box. 9. Click OK to make the job-storage features available. To disable the job-storage feature, follow these steps: 148 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Configure tab. 7. Click More…. 8. Click to clear the Job Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration Options box. NOTE When the job-storage features are disabled (that is, when the Job Storage Enabled check box is not selected and the settings are saved), the Job Storage tab is not visible. If the job-storage feature is enabled (with at least 80 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab: ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The following figure shows the Job Storage tab. ENWW Job Storage tab features 149 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-19 Job Storage tab Topics: 150 ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Status dialog box ● Job Storage Mode ● PIN ● Job Notification Options ● User Name ● Job Name ● Using job-storage features when printing Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. Status dialog box The unlabeled dialog box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job Storage tab. Job Storage Mode Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 5200 printer to store documents at the device and then control their printing at the device control panel. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options: ● Off ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections. Off When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the device. To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the device must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB. When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the device control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the device at the control panel. After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the device. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the device with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the device. NOTE The device configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the device memory will overwrite the existing document. ENWW Job Storage tab features 151 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Proof and Hold Private Job To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled, and the device must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB. When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the device, but is not printed until you request the job at the device control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is immediately deleted from the device. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the device. The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. The text field does not allow you to type more than four characters. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job. PIN The PIN group box is usually inactive. The option within the PIN group box, PIN to Print, is activated if you select either of the following options: ● Select Private Job. If selected, you must type the PIN number at the device control panel in order to print the job. ● Select Stored Job, and then select the Require PIN to Print check box. If the Require PIN to Print check box is selected, you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private. Job Notification Options HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Clicking a job-storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed. The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the device name, port, and location. User Name Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the device control panel. The following are the User Name settings: 152 ● Windows User Name. This option associates your MS Windows user name with the stored print job. The MS Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options. ● Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click the Custom option, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters. Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Job Name Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the device control panel. The following are the Job Name settings: ● <Automatic> This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. ● Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which <Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel display. The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the device control-panel display. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated. When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel display. Using job-storage features when printing To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps: 1. Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears. NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features. ENWW 2. Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Job Storage tab. 4. Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields. 5. Click OK. Job Storage tab features 153 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the device software can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name, or when one is created automatically, the device software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want the device software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name. Releasing a job-storage print job After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the device control panel. (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up arrow) and (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device (select). control panel, and then press 3. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to your user name, and then press 4. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to the job name, and then press 5. Press (up) and (select). 6. Press 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) and (down) to select the first digit of the PIN, (select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk. and then press Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. (select). (select). (down) until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press (select). If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with step 8. 8. Press 9. Press (up) and (down) to select the number of copies to print. (select) to print the job. Deleting a job-storage print job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory. You can do this from the device control panel. (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 1. Press 2. Press (the up arrow) and (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device (select). control panel, and then press 3. Press 4. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to your user name, and then press 5. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to the job name, and then press 6. Press (up) and (select). 7. Press 8. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) and (down) to select the first digit of the PIN, (select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk. and then press Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. (select). (select). (select). (down) until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press (select). If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. 9. Press (select) to delete the job. The stored print job is deleted and the device returns to the READY state. 154 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Basics tab features To gain access to the Basics tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Basics tab. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job. You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver. Figure 4-20 Basics tab ENWW Basics tab features 155 The Basics tab contains the following controls: ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Copies ● Orientation ● Document preview image ● About… Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset (by the administrator) or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. Copies Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print. The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1. Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program that you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the software program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows NOTE For some software programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these software programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the software program, wherever possible. Orientation Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait. NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation. 156 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The Orientation group box contains three options: ● Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media. ● Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media. ● Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media. You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image. Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Properties driver tabs: ● Finishing ● Effects ● Paper ● Basics About… ● Click OK. ● Press Esc. ● Press Alt + F4. ● Press Enter. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows When you click About on the Basics tab, or you click the HP logo on any of the driver Properties tabs, the About This Driver dialog box appears. To close it, perform any of the following actions: The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box. The information that it contains varies according to driver, date, and version. ENWW Basics tab features 157 Figure 4-21 About This Driver dialog box The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● Printer name ● Driver name ● Print driver version number ● Copyright information ● Driver Extensions (if any) ● Configuration Status The printer name, the driver name, the print driver version number, and the copyright information appear at the top of the About This Driver dialog box. The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions, if any. The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined. 158 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Configure tab features To gain access to the Configure tab in Windows 98 or Windows Me, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Configure tab. Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the device hardware configuration. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by clicking Update Now. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now button is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0). When opened from the Printers folder, the Configure tab looks like the following figure. ENWW Configure tab features 159 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-22 Configure tab The Configure tab contains the following controls: ● Printer Model ● Paper Handling Options ● Other Options ● Automatic configuration ● Printer image Printer Model In the Printer Model group box, the driver title depends on the printer model that is being used. Selection of any model in the drop-down menu makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on the tab. 160 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The Printer Model setting automatically changes to User Configured whenever you change any of the device configuration settings on the tab. The list of models and the changes they produce are described in the following table. The models are as follows: ● 5200: HP LaserJet 5200 ● 5200n: HP LaserJet 5200n ● 5200tn: HP LaserJet 5200tn ● 5200dtn: HP LaserJet 5200dtn Driver location Setting 5200 5200n 5200tn 5200dtn Configuration tab Duplexing Unit Available, not selected Available, not selected Available, not selected Selected Allow Manual Duplexing Selected Selected Selected Selected Mopier Enabled Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Selected Optional Paper Sources (None) (None) (None) HP 500-Sheet Input Tray Printer Hard Disk Available, not selected (and not supported by the HP LaserJet 5200 printer) Available, not selected (and not supported by the HP LaserJet 52 00 printer) Available, not selected (and not supported by the HP LaserJet 5 200 printer) Available, not selected (and not supported by the HP LaserJet 5 200 printer) Job Storage Enabled Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Selected Font Card(s) Available, not selected Available, not selected Available, not selected Available, not selected Alternative Letterhead Mode Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Available, not selected Ignore Application Collation Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Available, not selected Total Memory 48 MB 64 MB 64 MB 128 MB Driver work space (DWS) 6.0 MB 14.0 MB 14.0 MB 46.0 MB Include Types in Applications Source List Selected Selected Selected Selected More Configuration Options dialog box If it is installed and working, the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the configuration accordingly, either during installation or when you select Update Now on the Configure tab. However, the printer-model name that appears in the Printer Model text box is set to Autoconfigured. Paper Handling Options The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls: ENWW Configure tab features 161 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Table 4-7 Printer-model configuration settings ● Duplexing unit ● Allow Manual Duplexing ● Mopier Enabled ● Optional Paper Sources Duplexing unit The HP LaserJet 5200tn and HP LaserJet 5200dtn printer models are equipped with automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), which you can use to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic 2-sided printing is not supported for the following media types: ● Transparency ● Labels ● Cardstock ● Tough Paper ● Envelope NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing. The device uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page. Allow Manual Duplexing Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The device pauses while you make this adjustment. Mopier Enabled HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once, and then temporarily storing it in memory. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the device has a minimum total memory of 80 MB, and the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is on. Mopier mode and collation Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver performs mopying, which is the ability to send multiple original print jobs to the device. Collating is controlled by using either the print driver or the document software program. Click to clear the Mopier Enabled selection on the Configure tab to disable the feature. Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application Collation check box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click More… on the Configure tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is selected, to allow the software program to control collation. 162 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled, you must clear the Ignore Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected. The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result," shows how a three-page print job would appear. Table 4-8 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings Mopier Enabled Application collation Ignore Application Collation Expected result Not selected Not selected Not available 3 copies uncollated Not selected Selected Not available 3 copies collated Selected Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated Selected Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated Selected Selected Not selected 3 copies collated by printer Selected Selected Selected 3 copies collated by printer Optional Paper Sources The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media source trays for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. The list of available source trays varies depending on the printer, its input accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab. ● (None). This is the default setting for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. ● HP 500-Sheet Input Tray HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows For the HP LaserJet 5200 printer, the following settings are available in the Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu: Other Options The Other Options group box contains a single More… command button. Click More… to open the More Configuration Options dialog box. ENWW Configure tab features 163 Figure 4-23 More Configuration Options dialog box The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● Storage ● Fonts ● Alternative Letterhead Mode ● Ignore Application Collation ● Printer Memory ● Include Types in Application Source List Storage The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes. NOTE A printer hard disk is not available for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Do not select the Printer Hard Disk setting. If your HP LaserJet 5200 printer does not have a minimum of 80 MB of memory, job-storage options are not available. When the job-storage feature is enabled, the device can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the device control panel. Fonts The Fonts group box contains a Font Card(s) check box and a corresponding Configure button. Selecting the Font Card(s) check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed, and that stored data about the fonts on the card is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is enabled. Click Configure to open the Configure Font Cards dialog box. If the Font Card(s) check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box, selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box. 164 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Figure 4-24 Configure Font Cards dialog box ● Add up to four font cards by clicking the Add button. ● Specify a unique font-card name. ● Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards. ● Select one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list. The list to the right (Fonts) shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card(s). ● Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s). Complete the following steps to configure a font card: ENWW 1. Make sure that the font card is installed correctly. 2. Click Add. The Add Font Card dialog box appears. 3. Click Browse. The Font Card Files dialog box appears. 4. Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font card. 5. Click OK. 6. Specify a font-card name in the Add Font Card dialog box, if necessary. 7. Click OK. The selected .PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list. Select the .PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list. 8. Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box. The fonts on the card should now be available on the system. Configure tab features 165 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks: NOTE When using font cards with the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver: To install screen fonts that match the font card, use the .HPB file that is specifically designed to work with that card. If no screen fonts exist for the card, use the .PCM file that is specifically designed to work with that card. Alternative Letterhead Mode When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or facedown, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown. When this option is selected, you must select one of the following options in the Type is setting: ● Letterhead ● Preprinted Ignore Application Collation This setting overrides collation options that are selected in the print options of a software program. When Ignore Application Collation is selected, the print driver collates in the most appropriate way for the print job. The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using. Printer Memory The Total Memory value shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the printer. The Total memory value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer. The default values for total printer memory are specified on the Configuration tab. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Driver Work Space (DWS) value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available to the printer. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance. The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers automatically configure the Total Memory and (DWS) values in Windows 98 and Windows Me environments that support bidirectional communication. To manually set the Total Memory and (DWS) values, print a configuration page and find the Total Memory and DWS values in the Memory section of the page. Then, click More… on the Configuration tab, and either use the up and down arrows to select the appropriate values or type the Total Memory and DWS values in the Total Memory and (DWS) fields of the More Configuration Options dialog box. Include Types in Application Source List When the Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected, all media types (such as heavy media and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you are in a software program, you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu and then clicking Properties. Automatic configuration If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet 5200 printer since installation, click Update Now to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. 166 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW If the Update Now button is not available, select the appropriate configuration options on the Configure tab. If you have more than one driver installed on your device (for example, the default HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for your device model. Printer image The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the device according to the driver configuration data. It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows NOTE The device image shown on the Configure tab might differ from the HP LaserJet 5200 printer, depending on the accessories that are installed. ENWW Configure tab features 167 HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features When you install the printing-system software in Windows 98 or Windows Me, the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default. The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver (PS Emulation Driver) can be installed by performing a Custom Installation. NOTE Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP LaserJet 5200 print drivers, but you can use print drivers for legacy HP devices whose feature sets closely match the HP LaserJet 5200 printer feature set. For instance, you can use the HP LaserJet 5100 drivers, but some print-driver features might be missing and print quality might be compromised. HP does not support the use of any print driver other than the driver that is supplied for the device. When you install the print drivers in Windows NT 4.0, you must use the Add Printer installation method to install the PS Emulation Driver. This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver Properties interface. It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for Windows 98 and Windows Me. Access to print drivers in Windows 98 and Windows Me In Windows 98 and Windows Me, you have access to a single set of driver tabs. To gain access to the print drivers, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties to gain access to all print-driver tabs. The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print-job output and become the default settings for all software programs. The following print-driver tabs are available in Windows 98 and Windows Me: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● Graphics ● Fonts ● Device Options ● PostScript ● General ● Details ● Sharing ● Paper Only device-specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR; the other driver tabs are part of the operating system. The following tabs are described: 168 ● Paper ● Graphics Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW ● Fonts ● Device Options ● PostScript PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet 5200 A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently install soft fonts in the printer, postscript fonts are available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript fonts are purchased from Adobe. Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet PostScript 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe PostScript print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe Web site at the following Web site: www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html See the Font support section of this STR for a list of the additional fonts. Help system The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and configuration options. NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers, is not available in the PS Emulation Driver. What's this Help ● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears. ● Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears. ● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears. Context-sensitive Help When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears. Paper tab features To gain access to the Paper tab, follow these steps: ENWW 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 169 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Windows 98 and Windows Me support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways: 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Paper tab. The Paper tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the Paper tab. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-25 Paper tab The Paper tab contains the following controls: 170 ● Paper size ● Layout ● Orientation ● Paper source ● Copies ● Unprintable Area… Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW ● More Options… ● About … ● Restore Defaults Paper size The Paper size selection area lists the paper or envelope sizes that the HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports. Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of supported media sizes (forms), and then click the icon to specify the media that you want. A red circle with a line through any of the paper icons means that paper size is available, but you must change a driver setting before you can print on that media size. The setting might be on the Paper tab, such as the Paper source setting, or it might be a setting on the device control panel. Clicking Custom page 1, Custom page 2, or Custom page 3 makes the Custom button available at the bottom of the Paper tab. Clicking Custom opens the Custom-defined size dialog box that you can use to define a custom paper size. The following figure shows the Custom-defined size dialog box. The following controls appear on the Custom-defined size dialog box: ENWW ● Paper name text box. Use this option to type a name for this custom media size. You can define up to three custom sizes at one time. ● Width spin box. Use this control to specify the width for this custom media size. ● Length spin box. Use this control to specify the length for this custom media size. ● Units group box. Click Inches or Millimeters to specify the measurement unit for this custom media size. ● Transverse check box. Clicking this check box rotates the document 90° when it is printed on a roll-fed device. Depending on the size of the printed page, you might save media` if you rotate the page when printing. ● Restore defaults button. Click this button to restore the settings in the Custom-defined size dialog box to their original values. HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 171 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-26 Custom-designed size dialog box Layout Use the settings in this group box to specify how many pages of the document print on a single sheet. For example, clicking 1 up prints one page of the document on each sheet. Clicking 2 up prints two pages on each sheet of paper, dividing the sheet in half. The Layout group box values are ignored if you print an EPS file. The following options are available in the Layout group box: ● 1 up ● 2 up ● 4 up Orientation The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on the page. The following options are available: ● Portrait option button. Use this button to print your document in portrait mode. When you click this button, the page icon shows an example of the portrait orientation. ● Landscape option button. Use this button to print your document in landscape mode. When you click this button, the page icon shows an example of the landscape orientation. ● Rotated check box. The Rotated check box becomes available when you click the Landscape option. Select the Rotate check box to rotate the image on the page. To see the current dimensions of the page, such as the paper size and the unprintable margins, point to the page icon, and then press and hold down the mouse button. The Orientation group box is replaced by the Page dimensions in inches group box as seen in the following figure. Releasing the mouse button restores the Orientation group box. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-27 Page dimensions in inches Paper source This setting specifies where the media that you want to use is located in the printer. The default setting is Auto Select Tray, which causes the printer to use the tray that supports the paper size that you have chosen. The following options are available: 172 ● Auto Select Tray ● Printer Auto Select ● Manual Feed in Tray 1 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW ● Tray 1 through Tray 3, if installed on the device. If any of these trays are not installed, a red circle with a slash through it appears next to the tray name. ● Each of the paper types that the HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports, such as Plain, Preprinted, and Letterhead. For a full list of supported paper types see Driver-supported media types. Copies Use this box to specify the number of copies to print. You can print from 1 to 999 copies. This option is ignored when printing an .EPS file. Some software programs override this setting. Unprintable Area… Click Unprintable Area … to open the Unprintable Area dialog box, which is shown in the following figure. Figure 4-28 Unprintable Area dialog box The area of the page that cannot be printed appears in the Unprintable Area dialog box. Changing these settings to exceed the built-in page margins can cause the text in your document to be cut off when printed. More Options… HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Click More Options … to open the More Paper Options dialog box, shown in the following figure. Figure 4-29 More Paper Options dialog box The single control on this dialog box is the Printing on both sides (duplex printing) group box. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 173 NOTE As a rule, extra memory need not be installed on the HP LaserJet 5200 printer in order to print on both sides. However, very complex double-sided print jobs might require additional memory. Use the settings in this group box to specify how you want to turn the page if you print on both sides. When you print on two sides of the page, the document can be read differently depending on the way it is printed. For example, you could have the pages of the document turn like a book or like a calendar. When you click Flip On Long Edge or Flip On Short Edge, the page icon changes to illustrate how the printed document will look. About … Click About… to open a dialog box that contains copyright and version information about the print driver. The following figure shows the About dialog box. Figure 4-30 About dialog box Restore Defaults HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Paper tab to their original values. Graphics tab features To gain access to the Graphics tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Graphics tab. The Graphics tab specifies the resolution, halftoning, and scaling settings for the device. The following figure shows the Graphics tab. 174 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Figure 4-31 Graphics tab ● Resolution ● Halftoning ● Special ● Scaling ● Restore Defaults Resolution Use the Resolution drop-down menu to specify the resolution for printing. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). The following options are available: The dpi setting for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer is 600 dpi. ENWW ● 1200 ● 600 dpi. This is the default setting. ● 300 dpi HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 175 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Graphics tab contains the following controls: Halftoning The Halftoning options specify values for the number of lines per inch (frequency) and angle of the pattern that you want to use for halftone screens. If print jobs have a moiré pattern when you print graphics such as photographs or detailed images, you might want to adjust these settings. However, the default printer settings should work in most cases. Do not change these settings unless you have experience using halftones. To return to the default settings after you have made changes, click Use printer's settings. Special The Special group box contains the following options: ● Print as a negative image. Selecting this option prints a negative of the image by complementing the RGB values or reversing the black and white values. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting. ● Print as a mirror image. Selecting this option prints a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting. Scaling Use the Scaling control to specify the size of the image to print. You can specify from 25% to 400% of the original size. A setting of 400%, for example, prints an image four times larger than the original. When you enlarge a document, only the portion of the document that fits on the page prints. The default setting is 100%. Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Graphics tab to their original values. Fonts tab features HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Fonts tab controls the fonts for the HP PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the Fonts tab. 176 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Figure 4-32 Fonts tab ● Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table ● Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts ● Always use TrueType fonts Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table Use this option to substitute a postscript printer font for the common TrueType fonts in a document. This can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. By default, common TrueType fonts are substituted when printing, but uncommon ones are downloaded to the device. If you substitute a printer font for a TrueType font, the printed document might not match the look of the document on the screen. Click Edit the Table… to customize which TrueType fonts are downloaded and which printer fonts should be substituted for TrueType fonts. Font Substitution Table Click this option to open the Font Substitution Table dialog box, which makes available the options for changing the TrueType-to-postscript font mapping. The following figure shows the Font Substitution Table dialog box. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 177 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The following options are available: Figure 4-33 Font Substitution Table Always use built-in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts Click this option to use font-matching rules to find the best printer font to substitute for TrueType fonts in your document. TrueType fonts are not downloaded when the document is printed. This can speed up printing, but the printed fonts might not exactly match the fonts on the screen. Always use TrueType fonts Click this option to download TrueType fonts to the device when your document is printed. This ensures that the printed document looks the same as it does on the screen, but printing might take longer. Click Send Fonts As… to specify the format in which the TrueType fonts are sent to the device. Send Fonts As… Use this option to specify how TrueType fonts are downloaded. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 178 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Figure 4-34 Send Fonts As… dialog box The following options are available: ● Send TrueType fonts as. This control offers the following settings: ● Outlines. Use this setting for scalable outlines. ● Bitmaps. Use this setting for bitmaps. ● Type 42. Type 42 fonts are TrueType fonts with headers that enable them to be rendered by the PS Emulation Driver. ● Don't Send. Use this setting if you do not want any TrueType fonts to be downloaded. Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts, measured in pixels (in pixel size at the current resolution). Use this control to specify the size of the font (in pixels) at which the PS Emulation Driver driver should switch from downloading TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts to downloading them as outline (Type 1) fonts. The most efficient threshold value varies depending on the printing resolution. For example, at 300 dpi, downloading TrueType fonts as outlines becomes efficient when fonts are about 25 points or larger. If this value is 0, outline (Type 1) fonts are always sent. ● ENWW Favor system TrueType fonts over printer fonts that have the same name. Use this option to specify whether to use system TrueType fonts instead of printer fonts when the same font is found on both the computer and the printer. Printer fonts are the default. HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 179 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● Using printer fonts can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded. However, the fonts in the printed document might not exactly match the fonts on the screen. ● Send PostScript fonts as. Use this option to specify whether to download PostScript fonts to the printer. The following options are available: ● In Native Format. Click this option to download the PostScript font files to the device before the document prints. ● Don't Send. If you click this option, no fonts are downloaded. This does not affect downloading of TrueType fonts. Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Fonts tab to their original values. Device Options tab features To gain access to the Device Options tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Options tab. The Device Options tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print driver. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows When the driver is opened from within a software program, the Device Options tab includes only the Printer features controls. When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Options tab appears as shown in the following figure. 180 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Changes that you make to the Device Options tab are not reflected in the Properties settings until the modified device settings have been applied and the Properties tabs have been re-opened. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Device Options tab, click Apply, close the Properties tabs, and then re-open the Properties tabs. The Device Options tab contains the following options: ● Available printer memory ● Printer features ● Installable options ● Restore Defaults This section also contains information about using job-storage features. NOTE Use the dynamic Change settings for: control in the Printer features and the Installable options sections of the Device Options tab to change the setting for the feature or option that you have selected. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 181 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Figure 4-35 Device Options tab Available printer memory The Available printer memory control specifies the amount of memory in the device. If the value in this control does not match the amount of memory in the printer model, use the spin box to specify the correct amount of memory. Printer features The Printer features group box shows settings that are specific to the printer. You can change the settings by selecting the setting you want to change and then specifying a new value in the Change setting for list. The following printer-feature settings are available on this tab: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● FastRes 1200 ● User ● PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) ● PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) ● PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) ● PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) ● HPPJLEncoding ● Economode ● Job storage ● Collate ● Fit to Page ● Print Quality ● Watermark ● Watermark (Pages per Sheet) ● Watermark Font ● Watermark Size ● Watermark Angle ● Watermark Style ● Watermark Intensity ● Print Watermark FastRes 1200 The FastRes 1200 setting contains the following options: 182 ● On ● Off. This is the default setting. Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW User The default value for this setting is System Name (if available). Additional values for this setting include numbers 1 through 20. PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) The default value for the PIN digit 1 (for Private Job) setting is 0. PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) The default value for the PIN digit 2 (for Private Job) setting is 0. PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) The default value for the PIN digit 3 (for Private Job) setting is 0. PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) The default value for the PIN digit 4 (for Private Job) setting is 0. HPPJLEncoding The HPPJLEncoding feature contains the control for the UTF8 feature. Economode The Economode feature contains the following options: ● False (default) ● True HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time when the average toner coverage is significantly less than 5%, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances, you must install a new print cartridge, even if toner remains in the cartridge. NOTE The EconoMode setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed. HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts as well as the quantity of toner. If the EconoMode setting is used frequently, the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply of toner is depleted, increasing the risk of toner leaking. Use genuine HP parts to avoid this problem. Job storage The default value for this setting is Off, which means that the print job will not be stored in the device. NOTE The job-storage feature requires at least 80 MB of total memory. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 183 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page. However, it also reduces print quality. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs. If the job-storage feature is enabled (with at least 80 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab: ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps: 1. Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears. NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features. 2. Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Device Options tab. 4. In the Printer features setting, select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields. 5. Click OK. After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the device control panel. (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 1. Press 2. Press (the up arrow) and (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device (select). control panel, and then press 3. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to your user name, and then press 4. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to the job name, and then press 5. Press (up) and (select). 6. Press 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) and (down) to select the first digit of the PIN, (select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk. and then press Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. (select). (select). (down) until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press (select). If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. 8. Press 9. Press (up) and (down) to select the number of copies to print. (select) to print the job. Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory. You can do this from the device control panel. 184 (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up arrow) and (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device (select). control panel, and then press 3. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to your user name, and then press Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows (select). ENWW 4. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to the job name, and then press (select). 5. Press (up) and (select). 6. Press 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) and (down) to select the first digit of the PIN, (select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk. and then press Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. (down) until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press (select). If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. 8. Press (select) to delete the job. Collate The Collate feature contains the following options: ● On (turn off in application) ● Off Fit to Page The Fit to Page feature contains the following options: ● Prompt User for correct size (default) ● Nearest Size and Scale ● Nearest Size and Crop ● Letter ● A4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Print Quality The Print Quality drop-down menu contains the following controls in the PS Emulation Unidriver: ● 1200 dpi ● FastRes 1200 ● 600 dpi ● 300 dpi Watermark The Watermark feature contains the following options: ENWW ● None (default) ● Draft ● Company Confidential ● Company Proprietary HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 185 ● Company Private ● Confidential ● Copy ● Copyright ● File Copy ● Final ● For Internal Use Only ● Preliminary ● Proof ● Review Copy ● Sample ● Top Secret ● Urgent ● Custom Watermark (Pages per Sheet) The Watermark (Pages per Sheet) feature contains the following options: ● 1 (default) ● >=2 Watermark Font HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Watermark Font feature contains the following options: ● Courier Bold ● Helvetica Bold (default) ● Times Bold Watermark Size Watermark Size. Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points. The default is 48 points. Watermark Angle Watermark Angle. Settings for the watermark angle range from 90° to -90° in 15° intervals. The default is a 45° angle. 186 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Watermark Style The Watermark Style feature contains the following options: ● Narrow Outline ● Medium Outline (default) ● Wide Outline ● Wide Halo Outline ● Filled Watermark Intensity The Watermark Intensity feature contains the following options: ● Darkest ● Darker ● Dark ● Medium Dark ● Medium ● Medium Light ● Light ● Lighter ● Lightest Print Watermark ● No (default) ● All Pages ● First Page Only HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows The Print Watermark feature contains the following options: Installable options This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. The following controls are available: ENWW ● Tray 3 ● Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) ● Printer Hard Disk ● Mopier Mode ● Job Storage HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 187 ● VMOption Tray 3 This control specifies whether you have an optional 500-sheet feeder tray (Tray 3) installed on the printer. The default setting is Uninstalled. Duplex Unit (for 2-sided Printing) The HP LaserJet 5200 printer is equipped with automatic two-sided printing (duplexing), which allows you to print on both sides of supported media. Automatic two-sided printing is not supported for the following media types: ● Transparency ● Labels ● Cardstock ● Tough Paper ● Envelope NOTE The HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports smart duplexing. The printer detects information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if printable information appears on the second side of the page. Printer Hard Disk When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode option are enabled in the print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows NOTE A printer hard disk is not available for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Do not select the Installed setting. Mopier Mode The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Options tab is Enabled. Job Storage When the job-storage feature is enabled, the device can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel. 188 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW VMOption This option shows the amount of virtual memory (RAM) in the device. The following options are available: ● 48 MB ● 64 MB (default) ● 80 MB ● 96 MB ● 112 MB ● 128 MB ● 176 MB ● 192 MB ● 304 MB ● 320 MB ● 512 MB Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Device Options tab to their original values. PostScript tab features 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers. 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the PostScript tab. The PostScript tab controls the PostScript functions for the PS Emulation Driver. The following figure shows the PostScript tab. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 189 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows To gain access to the PostScript tab, follow these steps: Figure 4-36 PostScript tab The PostScript tab contains the following controls and options: HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ● PostScript output format ● PostScript header ● Print PostScript error information ● PostScript timeout values ● Advanced… ● Restore Defaults PostScript output format Use the PostScript output format list to specify the format for PostScript files. The following options are available: 190 ● PostScript (optimize for speed). Use this setting for printing most documents. ● Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This is useful, for instance, if you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different printer. Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW ● Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from a different program. ● Archive Format. Use this setting to create a PostScript file that you can use later. ● PJL archive format. This setting notifies the printer that the document is being printed in a different printer language. PostScript header Use the PostScript header options to specify whether to send header information to the device each time you print a document. The following options are available: ● Download header with each print job. This is the default setting and is sufficient or most types of printing. Use this setting if you print to a shared network device or to a file on a disk. ● Assume header is downloaded and retained. If you print to a local printer, you can save printing time by sending the header information to the device only once. ● Send Header Now. Click this button to send header information to the device. This option is ignored when you specify EPS, Archive, or PJL Archive formats. Print PostScript error information Use the Send PostScript error information option to print postscript error messages after the document has been printed. The PS Emulation Driver can detect certain errors that MS Windows cannot. If you are having printing problems, click this option. This information can help you, a system administrator, or a device-support representative determine what caused the problem. The error message information is not included in EPS format. PostScript timeout values ● Job timeout. This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the device before the device stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the device continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds. ● Wait timeout. This control specifies how long the device waits to get more postscript information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the device stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the device waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds. Advanced… Click Advanced … to open the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box, which appears in the following figure. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 191 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Use the following options to specify the postscript timeout values for the printer. Figure 4-37 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box The following options are available on the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box: ● PostScript Language Level ● Bitmap compression ● Data format ● Send CTRL+D before job ● Send CTRL+D after job HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows PostScript Language Level The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use, from 1 to the highest level that the device supports. Some devices support multiple levels. It is usually best to select the highest level that is available, because a higher language-level provides more features. In some instances, however, you would still use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file will be printed by someone who has a level-1 device, you would need to select level 1. You can choose between PostScript Level 1 and PostScript Level 2 features for the HP LaserJet 5200. Bitmap compression Use this control to specify whether to compress graphics before sending your document to the device. If you are using PostScript level 2, or if you are using PostScript level 1 and a device connected to a serial port, click Compress bitmap images. If you are using PostScript level 1 and a device connected to a parallel port or if you are using a network device, click No bitmap compression. 192 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Data format This control specifies the protocol that the device uses for print jobs. The following options are available: ● ASCII data. This is the default setting. When you click ASCII data, data is sent in ASCII format (7bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port. ● Binary communications protocol. When you click Binary communications protocol, the device sends all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format. This format can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and is faster than sending data in ASCII format. If you select this option, click Send Mode to switch the device to Binary Communications Protocol (BCP) for future print jobs. NOTE This option is available only if the computer is connected to the device through a direct connection (a USB or parallel cable). ● Tagged binary communications protocol. When you click Tagged Binary Communications Protocol, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format. ● Pure binary data. When you click Pure binary data, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format. Send CTRL+D before job This control specifies whether the device is reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Pressing Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a device that is connected through parallel or serial ports, select the Send CTRL+D before job check box. This control specifies whether the device will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is off (unselected). Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network device, click to select the Send CTRL+D before job check box. Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the PostScript tab to their original values. ENWW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver features 193 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows Send CTRL+D after job HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows 194 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows Introduction This document describes the features of the HP LaserJet 5200 unidrivers. The unidrivers are the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver (PS Emulation Unidriver) for Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit). NOTE For a comparison of features between the HP unidrivers and HP traditional print drivers in various operating systems, see Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems. You can control print jobs from several places: ● Device control panel ● Software-program print-dialog box ● Driver user interface Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override device control-panel settings. When you install the print-system software in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation. The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver. This document also describes differences between the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver. Unless otherwise noted, features described here apply to all three. ENWW ● Access to print drivers in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ● Help system ● Advanced tab features ● Paper/Quality tab features Introduction HP unidrivers for Windows The following topics are addressed in this document: 195 ● Effects tab features ● Finishing tab features ● Job Storage tab features ● Services tab features ● Device Settings tab features ● About tab features HP unidrivers for Windows 196 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways: ● Device control panel ● Software-program print-dialog box ● Print-driver user interface Device control panel For information about controlling print jobs from the device control panel, see the HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide that came with the device, or download it from following Web site: www.hp.com/go/lj5200_software Software-program print-dialog box To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps: 1. Click File. 2. Click Print. 3. Click Properties. The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These driver settings apply only while that software program is open. Print-driver user interface You can control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. Here you have access to two sets of driver tabs: the Printing Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings that you make on the Printing Preferences driver tabs control the driver default settings for each user's profile. Installable options can be configured in the Properties driver tabs. Printing Preferences driver tabs ENWW 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. Access to print drivers in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 HP unidrivers for Windows The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software programs. To gain access to these tabs, follow these steps: 197 The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available: ● Advanced ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing ● Job Storage ● Services All of these tabs are device-specific, and are therefore described in detail in this document. The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled on the tab. The settings take effect only after you click OK on the Device Settings tab. Properties driver tabs This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties tabs, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. The following Properties print-driver tabs are available: ● General ● Sharing ● Ports ● Advanced ● Security ● Device Settings ● About Only device-specific HP driver tabs are described in this document; the other driver tabs are part of the operating system. The following Properties driver tabs are described in this document: HP unidrivers for Windows 198 ● Device Settings` ● About Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Help system The HP PCL 6 Unidriver, the HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options. NOTE Bubble Help, a feature of HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers, is not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver. What's this? Help Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways: ● Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears. ● Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help window for that feature appears. ● Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears. Context-sensitive Help When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, a context-sensitive Help message appears. Incompatible Print Settings messages Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the device capabilities or the current settings of other controls. NOTE Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the device to perform. Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the device documentation to ensure that the device has the expected capabilities. HP unidrivers for Windows In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically invalid print-driver configurations result in warning messages. Duplexing, for example, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. The following figure shows an Incompatible Print Settings message. ENWW Help system 199 Figure 5-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message To accept the change that was just made, click the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option and then click OK. The driver resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value. If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click I will resolve the conflict myself and then click OK. NOTE In this example, the conflict can be resolved manually. If the conflict is not resolved when the driver is closed, then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the device. HP unidrivers for Windows 200 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Advanced tab features To gain access to the Advanced tab, follow these steps: 1. click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Advanced tab. HP unidrivers for Windows Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as media size and copies in the driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab. ENWW Advanced tab features 201 Figure 5-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab The Advanced tab contains the following controls: ● Paper/Output ● Graphic ● Document Options Paper/Output HP unidrivers for Windows The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls: 202 ● Copy Count setting ● Collated check box (appears when you select Copy Count) Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Copy Count Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy count in the software program. The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1. Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts between the software program that you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the software program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). NOTE For some software programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these software programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the software program, wherever possible. Collated The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1. When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of each page print together. This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box. Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in the print driver, the Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program. Similarly, if the Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated. Graphic The Graphic setting contains the following control: ● True Type Font settings Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) to print documents that contain TrueType fonts by using equivalent printer fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special characters that the equivalent printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts. ENWW Advanced tab features 203 HP unidrivers for Windows True Type Font Document Options The Document Options setting contains the following controls: ● Advanced Printing Features ● Print Optimizations Advanced Printing Features When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available, depending on your device. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the Advanced tab, the feature is automatically re-enabled. Print Optimizations NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver. They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver. The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your document contains overlapping text and graphics, the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly. If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When this feature is disabled, print optimization-features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off. PostScript Options NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the PS Emulation Unidriver. They are not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver. Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop-down menu: ● Optimize for Speed. This is the default setting. ● Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document is a self-contained object. This option is useful if you want to create a postscript file and print it on a different printer. ● Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from another program. ● Archive format. Use this option to create a postscript file that you can use later. Select one of the following settings in the TrueType Font Download drop-down menu: HP unidrivers for Windows 204 ● Automatic. This is the default setting. The PS Emulation Driver determines which format is best. ● Outline. Select this option if you want to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font. ● Bitmap. Select this option to download the TrueType font as a bitmap font. ● Native TrueTypeIf the printer is a TrueType rasterizer printer; select this option to download the TrueType font as an outline font. Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Language Level drop-down menu: ● 3 ● 2 ● 1 The default setting is 3. It is usually better to select the highest number available, because it provides more features. In some instances, lower numbers might be necessary. For example, if you are printing a file to disk and that file is to be printed by someone with a level-1 printer, select 1. Select one of the following settings in the Send PostScript Error Handler drop-down menu: ● Yes. This is the default setting. When an error occurs in the print job, an error page is sent to the printer. ● No. Select this setting if you do not want an error page to be printed when an error occurs. Select one of the following settings in the Negative Output drop-down menu: ● Yes. Select this option to print a negative of the image by reversing the values for black and white. ● No. Print the image without reversing the values for black and white. This is the default setting. Printer Features The Printer Features setting contains the following controls: ● Print All Text as Black The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic. ● Send True Type as Bitmap NOTE The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and HP PCL 5 unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver. Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble using TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts. Graphics Mode HP unidrivers for Windows ● NOTE The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver. It is not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver. ENWW Advanced tab features 205 Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings: ● ● Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the device as a combination of HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting might produce higher-quality output. It is the default setting. ● Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the device as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases. Alternative Letterhead Mode When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face-up or face-down, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown. When this option is selected, you must use one of the following options in the Type is setting: ● Letterhead ● Preprinted NOTE Alternative Letterhead Mode is available only if the printer is equipped with an automatic duplexing unit. Layout Options The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting. Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last. NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change. HP unidrivers for Windows 206 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Paper/Quality tab features To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab, follow these steps: 1. click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Paper/Quality tab. HP unidrivers for Windows Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media. You can also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover of the document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab. ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 207 Figure 5-3 Paper/Quality tab The Paper/Quality tab contains the following control sets: HP unidrivers for Windows ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Paper Options ● Use Different Paper/Covers ● Document preview image ● Print Quality Print Task Quick Sets The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Because they are all the same control, any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on 208 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW the Paper/Quality tab affects all the Printing Preferences driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick Sets setting: ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing ● Job Storage Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs (except the Advanced tab, where the setting is not available). Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs. NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu: ● Default Print Settings ● User Guide Print Settings Default Print Settings When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom media sizes, or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for those items are not restored. Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK. The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the HP Driver Preconfiguration section for information about preconfigurable driver settings. Table 5-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer ENWW Feature setting location Default values for U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets Preconfigurable1 Print on Both Sides Finishing tab, Document Options group box Available, not selected Yes Flip Pages Up Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, not selected Yes Booklet Layout Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable, Off Yes Pages per Sheet Finishing tab, Document Options group box 1 page per sheet Yes Paper/Quality tab features HP unidrivers for Windows Driver feature 209 Table 5-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer (continued) HP unidrivers for Windows 210 Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets Preconfigurable1 Print Page Borders Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Page Order Finishing tab, Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Orientation Finishing tab, Orientation group box Portrait Yes Rotate by 180 degrees Finishing tab, Orientation group box Available, not selected Yes Resizing Options Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Actual Size Yes Print document on Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, not selected Yes Size to print on Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Actual Size Yes Scale to Fit Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Unavailable, selected Yes % of Normal Size Effects tab, Resizing Options group box Available, not selected Yes Watermarks Effects tab (none) Yes Watermarks First Page Only Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable, not selected Yes Current watermarks Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) (none) Yes Watermark Message Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) (none) Yes2 Message Angle (watermark) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) Diagonal Yes2 Watermark message angle (angle) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box (Click Edit for Watermark Details.) Unavailable unless the Angle option is selected, 52 degrees Yes Name (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Arial Yes2 Color (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Gray Yes2 Shading (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Very Light Yes2 Size (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box 80 No Style (watermark font) Effects tab, Watermark Details dialog box, Font Attributes group box Regular Yes2 Size is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Letter Yes Use Different Paper Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Available, not selected No Source is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Automatically Select Yes Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Table 5-1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer (continued) Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for U.S. English Print Task Quick Sets Preconfigurable1 Type is: Paper/Quality tab, Paper Options group box Unspecified Yes Economode Paper/Quality tab, Print Quality dialog box Available, unselected Yes Unlabeled group box Job Storage tab Status message: for example, Your job will be printed but not stored on the printer No Job Storage Mode Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Off is selected No Proof and Hold Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Private Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Quick Copy Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Stored Job Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Available, not selected No Require PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable, not selected No MS Windows User Name Job Storage tab, User Name group box Unavailable, selected (Windows User Name appears in field) No PIN to Print Job Storage tab, Require PIN group box Unavailable, not selected No Display Job ID when Job Storage tab, Job Notification Options printing group box Unavailable, selected No Job Name Unavailable, Automatically selected No 1 2 Job Storage tab, Job Name group box These features can be preconfigured by using one of the HP driver preconfiguration tools. For more information, See HP Driver Preconfiguration, or go to: www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw. Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me. User Guide Print Settings The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the HP LaserJet 5200 User Guide. ENWW ● On the Paper/Quality tab, Type Is: is set to Unspecified. ● On the Finishing tab, the Print on Both Sides check box is selected. ● On the Finishing tab, Flip Pages Up check box is selected. Paper/Quality tab features HP unidrivers for Windows When you select User Guide Print Settings, all of the settings are restored to the default settings, except for the following settings: 211 ● On the Finishing tab, Pages per Sheet is set to 2 pages per sheet. ● On the Finishing tab, Page Order is set to Right then Down. Default Print Settings By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Default Print Settings. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Default Print Settings, type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete. NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save more, a message box appears that states: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones. Paper Options The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections that are available by default. HP unidrivers for Windows Figure 5-4 Paper Options group box 212 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected. The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order: ● Size is ● Custom Paper Size ● Source is ● Type is ● Use Different Paper/Covers Size is The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes. When you move the mouse cursor over the dimensions label, the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units. Because media-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to use the driver to set media size only when you are printing from software programs that do not include a media-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes. NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document. When you change the print-driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the device, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray. For information about media sizes, see the Media attributes section of this STR. When the Use Different Paper/Covers check box is selected and different options are configured, the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. Custom Paper Size HP unidrivers for Windows The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click Custom… on the Paper/Quality tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box. ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 213 Figure 5-5 Custom Paper Size dialog box Name Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size. The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions: ● If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/ Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size. ● If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the default name of "Custom." ● If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved or the dialog box is closed. If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click Save, you can change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking Save, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning. Paper size The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper Size group box. HP unidrivers for Windows Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. If units are in millimeters, the custom media-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom media-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole 214 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed. The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current measurement units. Units To change measurement units, click one of the options in the Units group box (either Inches or Millimeters). Custom width and height control limits The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following table summarizes media size limits for each media-handling device. Table 5-2 PCL 6 custom media sizes Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose) Width 76 mm (3.0 inches) 312 mm (12.28 inches) Height 127 mm (5.0 inches) 470 mm (18.5 inches) Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 297 mm (11.7 inches) Height 210 mm (8.26 inches) 432 mm (17 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 297 mm (11.7 inches) Height 210 mm (8.26 inches) 432 mm (17 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 297 mm (11.7 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 432 mm (17 inches) Tray 3 (500-sheet, optional) Duplexing unit Source is The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. ● Automatically select ● Printer Auto Select ● Manual Feed in Tray 1 ● Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray) ● Tray 2 (250-sheet tray) ● Tray 3 (optional 500-sheet tray) The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP LaserJet 5200 uses the source tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 215 HP unidrivers for Windows The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been installed on the device: than Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray. For information about media sources, see the Media attributes section of this STR. Type is The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the HP LaserJet 5200 supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, which is usually Plain. No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the device when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the information an updated list of media types is returned. If bidirectional communication is not enabled, then the driver looks for custom media types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the driver. The following standard types appear in the list: ● Unspecified ● Plain ● Preprinted ● Letterhead ● Transparency ● Prepunched ● Labels ● Bond ● Recycled ● Color ● Light 60-75 g/m2 (16–20 lb) ● Cardstock 164-200 g/m2 (45–53 lb) ● Rough ● Tough Paper (Glossy Film) ● Envelope The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting. HP unidrivers for Windows When you change the print-driver setting to a media type that is not currently loaded in the device, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray. 216 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Use Different Paper/Covers You can print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options. When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the group box, along with the associated options: ● Front Cover ● First Page ● Other Pages ● Last Page ● Back Cover NOTE When you change the Source Is and Type is settings for any of the covers or pages, the settings remain configured until you close the software program from which you are printing. For example, if you select First Page and change the media source or type, and then select Back Cover to change the media source or type, the check mark remains beside Front Cover and the selected source and type settings remain in effect. The settings are cleared only when you close the software program. Front Cover Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document, or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document. HP unidrivers for Windows The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options. Figure 5-6 Front Cover options ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 217 The following are the Front Cover options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. When you select Front Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings you select remain configured until you close the software program. First Page Use the First Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the first page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. HP unidrivers for Windows Figure 5-7 First Page options 218 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The following are the First Page options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program. Other Pages Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the other pages of the document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. ENWW HP unidrivers for Windows Figure 5-8 Other Pages options Paper/Quality tab features 219 The following are the Other Pages options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings made in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program. Last Page Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the last page of a document. The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. HP unidrivers for Windows Figure 5-9 Last Page options 220 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The following are the Last Page options: ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program. Back Cover Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document, or to include a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document. The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options. Figure 5-10 Back Cover options ENWW ● Size is: drop-down menu ● Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box HP unidrivers for Windows The following are the Back Cover options: Paper/Quality tab features 221 ● Source is: drop-down menu ● Type is: drop-down menu The Size is: setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job. Changes made to the Size is: setting here override any previous Size is: settings in other Use Different Paper/Covers options. When you select Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option. NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab. The back cover setting is unavailable, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet. The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here. The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports. NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All Use Different Paper/ Covers options use the last Size is: setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper/ Covers options. When you change the type and source of the media and covers, the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program. Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs: ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse cursor over the document preview image, the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. Print Quality The Print Quality group box contains the following controls: HP unidrivers for Windows 222 ● Print Quality drop-down menu ● EconoMode Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Print Quality drop-down menu The Print Quality drop-down menu contains the following controls in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver: ● ProRes 1200 (170 lpi) ● ProRes 1200 (141 lpi) ● FastRes 1200 ● 600 dpi NOTE When a ProRes1200 setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on the FastRes 1200, which uses a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi. The Print Quality drop-down menu contains the following controls in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver: ● 600 dpi ● 300 dpi The Print Quality drop-down menu contains the following controls in the PS Emulation Unidriver: ● 1200 dpi ● FastRes 1200 ● 600 dpi ● 300 dpi NOTE When a “ProRes” setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on a “FastRes” setting. The “FastRes” setting emulates 1200-dpi printing, but places fewer dots on the page and uses less toner, and printing speed is faster than for documents printed on a “ProRes” setting. EconoMode Select the EconoMode check box to reduce the amount of toner on each printed page. Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page. However, it also reduces print quality. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs. NOTE The EconoMode setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed. HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts as well as the quantity of toner. If the EconoMode setting is used frequently, the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply of toner is depleted, increasing the risk of toner leaking. Use genuine HP parts to avoid this problem. ENWW Paper/Quality tab features 223 HP unidrivers for Windows HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time when the average toner coverage is significantly less than 5%, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances, you must install a new print cartridge, even if toner remains in the cartridge. The EconoMode option can be activated from the printer control panel, from the Print Quality tab in the software application properties, or from the Print Quality dialog on the Paper-Quality tab in the driver. If the EconoMode option is selected from the control panel, and if the printer has a genuine HP cartridge, the ON setting overrides any setting made in the application or driver, as shown in the following table. Driver EconoMode setting for print job HP Cartridge Device control panel reports EconoMode setting takes effect Selected Yes On Yes Selected No Off No Not selected Yes On Yes Not selected No Off No Selected Yes Off Yes Selected No Off No Not selected Yes Off No Not selected No Off No HP unidrivers for Windows 224 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Effects tab features To gain access to the Effects tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Effects tab. HP unidrivers for Windows Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following figure shows the Effects tab. ENWW Effects tab features 225 Figure 5-11 Effects tab The Effects tab contains the following controls: ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Resizing Options ● Document preview image ● Watermarks HP unidrivers for Windows Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. 226 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Resizing Options The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls: ● Actual Size (default) ● Print Document On setting ● Scale to Fit option ● % of Normal Size setting Actual Size Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size. Print Document On Click the Print Document On option to format the document for one media size and then print the document on a different media size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size. The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions: ● The % of Normal Size value is not 100. ● The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1. When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media. Scale to Fit HP unidrivers for Windows The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target media. If the document size is larger than the target media size, then the document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target media. The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal-size media with the Print Document On check box selected, and the target size specified as Letter. Figure 5-12 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ENWW Effects tab features 227 When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size. % of Normal Size The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer. The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected). Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview. The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator is dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%. You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into the entry box. The following settings disable % of Normal Size: ● Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected ● Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1 Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs: ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse cursor over the document preview image, the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. HP unidrivers for Windows Watermarks Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver: 228 ● (none) ● Confidential Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW ● Draft ● SAMPLE The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image. When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)". Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page). Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. Figure 5-13 Watermark Details dialog box Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However, clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled. ENWW Effects tab features 229 HP unidrivers for Windows The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes. Current watermarks The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created. To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab. To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box. To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark. NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled. To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark. Watermark Message The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on). Message Angle Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available: ● Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page. ● Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page. ● Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the numeric spin box to select the angle. Font Attributes HP unidrivers for Windows Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style of the font. 230 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls: ● Name The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is language-dependent. ● Color The Color drop-down menu contains only one option: Gray. ● Shading The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu: ● Lightest ● Very Light (default) ● Light ● Medium Light ● Medium ● Medium Dark ● Dark ● Very Dark ● Darkest These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select Darkest to produce a black watermark. ● Size Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. ● Style ● Regular ● Bold ● Italic ● Bold Italic HP unidrivers for Windows The following settings are available: The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular. Default watermark settings The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks. ENWW Effects tab features 231 Table 5-3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks Setting New watermark Preset watermark Name Arial Varies by language Color Gray Gray Shading Very Light Very Light Size 80 Varies by language Style Regular Regular Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled. HP unidrivers for Windows 232 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Finishing tab features To gain access to the Finishing tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows XP) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Finishing tab. HP unidrivers for Windows Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following figure shows the Finishing tab. ENWW Finishing tab features 233 Figure 5-14 Finishing tab The Finishing tab contains the following controls: ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Document options ● Document preview image ● Orientation HP unidrivers for Windows Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. 234 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Document options The Document Options group box contains the following controls: ● Correct Order for Rear Bin ● Print on Both Sides ● Flip Pages Up ● Booklet layout ● Pages per Sheet ● Print Page Borders ● Page Order Correct Order for Rear Bin The HP LaserJet 5200 has a door in the back that can be opened to make the paper go straight out the back of the printer. Use this bin or slot to minimize curl and avoid jams with heavier paper, such as cardstock. You may also need to feed the paper from the multipurpose tray for best results. The paper is delivered printed side up. Use this feature to order your pages correctly for this bin or slot. If you click this check box and also click Print on Both Sides, the printer prints the first side of each page, pauses for you to reload the paper, and then prints the second side of each page. Other documents cannot be printed while the printer is paused. Follow the onscreen instructions. Print on Both Sides The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist: ● ENWW Type is: on the Paper tab is set to any media type except for the following types: ● Labels ● Transparency ● Envelope ● Cardstock ● Tough Paper Size is: is set to any media size except for the following sizes: ● Statement ● Envelope #10 ● Envelope DL ● Envelope C5 ● Envelope B5 ● Envelope Monarch HP unidrivers for Windows ● Finishing tab features 235 NOTE As a rule, extra memory need not be installed on the HP LaserJet 5200 printer in order to print on both sides. However, very complex double-sided print jobs might require additional memory. Topics: ● Automatically print on both sides ● Manually print on both sides Automatically print on both sides The duplexing unit in the device prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both Sides option is specified in the print job. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models: ● HP LaserJet 5200tn ● HP LaserJet 5200dtn These printer models support smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver. All media types support the smart duplexing feature, except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides (such as labels, transparencies, and envelopes) and the following media types: ● Prepunched ● Preprinted ● Letterhead When the media type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled. To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as print mode. A different print mode is used with each media type. Print-mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic. Manually print on both sides Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the media for the HP LaserJet 5200 and HP LaserJet 5200n printer models, which do not have a duplexing unit installed. Also select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP LaserJet 5200 printer models for media types that are not available when using the automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick media. HP unidrivers for Windows Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation unidriver. If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the printer automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, and 8.5 x 13 only), and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported. 236 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job. The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side: ● Plain ● Preprinted ● Letterhead ● Prepunched ● Bond ● Recycled ● Color ● Rough NOTE To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing, you must select and apply the Not Installed setting on the Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) option on the Device Settings tab. Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode. Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side. To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps: Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box. 2. Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print. 3. When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message, insert the stack of media (on which the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure. HP unidrivers for Windows 1. ENWW Finishing tab features 237 Figure 5-15 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the stack of media. The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function. Flip Pages Up Use the Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the media orientation selected on the Finishing tab. Table 5-4 Page orientation Orientation (Finishing tab) Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected Portrait Short-edge binding Long-edge binding Landscape Long-edge binding Short-edge binding HP unidrivers for Windows When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together. 238 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar. Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book. Booklet layout The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices that are based on the current media size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the media size that is set on the Paper/Quality tab: ● Left Edge Binding ● Right Edge Binding When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. Topics: ● Book and Booklet Printing ● Print a booklet Book and Booklet Printing The HP LaserJet 5200 supports book and booklet printing. A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages. It can have a different media type for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the settings on the Paper tab (available when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box) to select the following printing options for the book: ● Front Cover ● First Page ● Other Pages ● Last Page ● Back Cover A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings. Print a booklet ENWW 1. Click File. 2. Click Print. 3. Click Properties. 4. Click the Finishing tab. HP unidrivers for Windows Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs. Finishing tab features 239 5. Select the Print on Both Sides check box. 6. In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for example, Right Edge Binding). 7. Click OK in the print driver. 8. Click OK in the print dialog box to print. Pages per Sheet Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six settings: ● 1 page per sheet (this is the default) ● 2 pages per sheet ● 4 pages per sheet ● 6 pages per sheet ● 9 pages per sheet ● 16 pages per sheet NOTE When you select an option other than 1 page per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable. Print Page Borders Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1. Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page. Page Order The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections: HP unidrivers for Windows ● Right, then Down ● Down, then Right ● Left, then Down ● Down, then Left The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following figure. 240 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Figure 5-16 Page-order preview images ● 2 pages per sheet ● 4 pages per sheet ● 6 pages per sheet ● 9 pages per sheet ● 16 pages per sheet Document preview image The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs: ● Paper/Quality ● Effects ● Finishing Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image. When you move the mouse cursor over the document preview image, the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image. Orientation Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that media feeds into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait. NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation. ● Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media. ● Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media. ● Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched media. You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview image. ENWW Finishing tab features 241 HP unidrivers for Windows The Orientation group box contains three options: Job Storage tab features To gain access to the Job Storage tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Job Storage tab. NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when at least 80 MB of total memory is installed and configured. Use the job-storage feature to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet 5200 printer memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the following sections. The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if job-storage feature is enabled. To support job-storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print postscript (.PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory. Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features. A minimum total memory of 80 MB is required to use the job-storage features. After additional memory is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the device. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers. To configure the drivers manually after installing additional memory, follow these steps: HP unidrivers for Windows 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. 7. If additional memory has been installed, select Printer Memory: under Installable Options, and then select either 96 MB, 128 MB, 160 MB, 192 MB, 256 MB, 288 MB, 320 MB, 384 MB, or 512 MB, depending on the total amount of memory currently installed. 8. Click OK to make the job-storage features available. NOTE The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job-storage feature is enabled. 242 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW To disable the job-storage feature, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. 7. Select Job Storage. 8. Select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears. NOTE When the job-storage feature is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not visible. If the job-storage feature is enabled (with at least 80 MB of total memory), two Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab: ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job HP unidrivers for Windows The following figure shows the Job Storage tab. ENWW Job Storage tab features 243 Figure 5-17 Job Storage tab NOTE This section also contains information about using the job-storage feature when printing. The Job Storage tab contains the following controls: HP unidrivers for Windows 244 ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Status group box ● Job Storage Mode ● Require PIN ● Job Notification Options ● User Name ● Job Name ● Using job-storage features when printing Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as media size and pages per sheet. Status group box The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job Storage tab. Job Storage Mode Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet 5200 printer to store documents at the device and then control their printing at the device control panel. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options: ● Off ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job Topics: ● Off ● Proof and Hold ● Private Job Off When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the device. Proof and Hold To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled. After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the device. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-andhold job to the device with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the device. ENWW Job Storage tab features 245 HP unidrivers for Windows When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the device at the control panel. NOTE The device configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-andhold jobs. The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the device memory will overwrite the existing document. Private Job To use the Private Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled. When you select Private Job, the print job is sent to the device, but is not printed until you request the job at the device control panel. Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box. The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel. After the job is printed, the job is immediately deleted from the device. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job. After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the device. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the device. Require PIN Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected. Select the PIN to Print box, then type a 4-digit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the device, where you must enter the 4-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job. The PIN to Print box is selected, but not available, when Private Job is selected. Type a 4-digit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the device, where you must type the 4-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job. Job Notification Options Clicking a Job Storage Mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The Display Job ID when printing option causes a pop-up dialog box to appear when the job-storage print job is printed. The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job, as well as the device name, port, and location. HP unidrivers for Windows 246 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW User Name Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the device control panel. The following are the User Name settings: ● Windows User Name. This option associates your MS Windows user name with the stored print job. The MS Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the Windows User Name options. ● Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. When you click Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the device control-panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated. Job Name Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the device control panel. The following are the Job Name settings: ● <Automatic> This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name. ● Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which <Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel display. The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z (uppercase or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the device control-panel display. If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated. If Job Name Exists. When you store a print job, you can create a print-job name or the device software can assign one automatically. If a print job with the same name already exists, the new print job will overwrite the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). After you create the print job name, or when one is created automatically, the device software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique. Select Replace Existing File if you always want the device software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name. ENWW Job Storage tab features 247 HP unidrivers for Windows When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel display. Using job-storage features when printing To use job-storage features when printing, follow these steps: 1. Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears. NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features. 2. Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3. Click the Job Storage tab. 4. Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any required fields. 5. Click OK. Topics: ● Releasing a job-storage print job ● Deleting a job-storage print job Releasing a job-storage print job After you send a print job that uses the job-storage feature, you can release the job to print from the device control panel. (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up arrow) and (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device (select). control panel, and then press 3. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to your user name, and then press 4. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to the job name, and then press 5. Press (up) and (select). 6. Press 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) and (down) to select the first digit of the PIN, (select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk. and then press Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. (select). (select). (down) until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press (select). If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. 8. Press 9. Press (up) and (down) to select the number of copies to print. (select) to print the job. HP unidrivers for Windows 248 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Deleting a job-storage print job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory. You can do this from the device control panel. (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up arrow) and (the down arrow) until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device (select). control panel, and then press 3. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to your user name, and then press 4. Press (up) and (down) to scroll to the job name, and then press 5. Press (up) and (select). 6. Press 7. If a PIN number is assigned to the job, press (up) and (down) to select the first digit of the PIN, (select). The number in the device control-panel display changes to an asterisk. and then press Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number. (select). (select). (down) until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel, and then press (select). If no PIN number is assigned to the job, continue with the next step. Press (select) to delete the job. HP unidrivers for Windows 8. ENWW Job Storage tab features 249 Services tab features To gain access to the Services tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Printing Preferences. 6. Click the Services tab. The Services tab is shown in the following figure. HP unidrivers for Windows Figure 5-18 Services tab 250 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The Services tab contains the following features: ● Internet Services ● Device services Internet Services The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop-down menu with the following selections: ● Online diagnostic tools. Open the HP Instant Support Web site, where you can find interactive tools and contacts for troubleshooting. ● Support and troubleshooting. Open the product page for the HP Business Center. ● Product manuals. Open a Web page from which you can view or download HP LaserJet 5200 printer manuals. ● Check for driver updates. Automatically check your print drivers to see whether the correct and most up-to-date print drivers are installed. ● Order supplies. Open the HP SureSupply Web page and shop online for HP LaserJet 5200 printer supplies. ● Show me how. Connect to a Web page that provides step-by-step instructions for performing specific tasks. The following information is available: ● Clear jams ● Load trays ● Load special media ● Print both sides ● Supported paper ● More Help If you have Internet access, select any of these items and click Go! to open the corresponding HP Web page. Device services HP unidrivers for Windows Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS. ENWW Services tab features 251 Device Settings tab features The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver. To gain access to the Device Settings tab, follow these steps: 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Available options depend on the driver and the particular feature. The following figure shows the Device Settings tab for the HP PCL 6 Unidriver. HP unidrivers for Windows Figure 5-19 HP PCL 6 Unidriver Device Settings tab The following figure shows the Device Settings tab for the PS Emulation Unidriver. 252 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Figure 5-20 PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab The Device Settings tab contains the following controls: ● Form to Tray Assignment ● Font Substitution Table ● External Fonts ● PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings ● Installable Options Form to Tray Assignment The HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports more than one source of media. You can assign a form (which defines the media size and margins) to each media source. When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The device prints from the tray to which that form is assigned. Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs. This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with media-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available. ENWW Device Settings tab features 253 HP unidrivers for Windows A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray. The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting. The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper/Quality tab. Configuring the trays 1. Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list. 2. Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (or form) that is loaded in that tray. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays. 4. Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click Cancel to reconfigure all the trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab. Font Substitution Table Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the device. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts. Click the Font Substitution Table option to open a list of fonts, as show in the following figure. Use the settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings. HP unidrivers for Windows Figure 5-21 Font Substitution Table 254 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW External Fonts NOTE The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver. Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the device. External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts. Click the External Fonts option to make the Properties button available. Click Properties to open the HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure. Figure 5-22 HP Font Installer dialog box Topics: ● Installing external fonts ● Removing external fonts Installing external fonts ENWW 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the name of the device. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. 7. Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears. Device Settings tab features HP unidrivers for Windows Follow these steps to install external fonts. 255 8. Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. 9. Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or click Browse to locate the file on the computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be Added window. 10. Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file names appear in the Installed Font(s) window. 11. Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box. Removing external fonts 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the name of the device. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Device Settings tab. 7. Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears. 8. Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window. 9. Select the fonts that you want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed. 10. Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box. PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings The following controls are available and appear only in the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab: HP unidrivers for Windows 256 ● Available PostScript Memory ● Output Protocol ● Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job ● Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ● Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray ● Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray ● Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts ● Job Timeout ● Wait Timeout ● Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW ● Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline Available PostScript Memory This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the device total physical memory. It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match the total RAM that is shown on the configuration page. To print a configuration page from the device control panel, follow these steps: (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up arrow) and (select). 3. Press 4. Press (up) and (the down arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press (down) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION. (select) to print the configuration page. Output Protocol This control specifies the protocol that the device uses for print jobs. The following options are available: ● ASCII (default) ● TBCP ● Binary When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port. When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format. When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format. Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job This control specifies whether the device will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The default setting is No. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a device connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes. This control specifies whether the device will be reset at the end of every postscript document. The default setting is Yes. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change Yes to No. ENWW Device Settings tab features 257 HP unidrivers for Windows Send Ctrl-D After Each Job Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in text to the gray provided by the PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available: ● Yes ● No. This is the default setting. Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in graphics to the gray provided by the PS Emulation Driver. The following settings are available: ● Yes ● No. This is the default setting. Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts This control specifies whether to add the Euro symbol to the printer fonts. The following settings are available: ● Yes. This is the default setting. ● No Job Timeout This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the device before the device stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the device continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds. Wait Timeout This control specifies how long the device waits to get more postscript information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the device stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the device waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds. Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixel(s). You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels. HP unidrivers for Windows Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The 258 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW default setting is 600 pixel(s). You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels. Installable Options Topics: ● Automatic Configuration ● Tray 3 ● Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) ● Allow Manual Duplexing ● Printer Memory ● Printer Hard Disk ● Job storage ● Mopier Mode ● Mopier mode and collation ● Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) ● JPEG Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) Automatic Configuration Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the device. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab. If you have more than one driver installed for the device (for example, the default HP PCL 6 Unidriver and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for the specific device model. Tray 3 This control specifies whether you have tray 3, an optional 500-sheet tray, installed on the device. The default setting is Not Installed. The HP LaserJet 5200tn and the HP LaserJet 5200dtn printer models come with a duplex unit installed. This setting is enabled (Installed) by default. ENWW Device Settings tab features 259 HP unidrivers for Windows Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing. The device uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer supports smart duplexing. The device uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page. Allow Manual Duplexing Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side. The device pauses while you make this adjustment. This setting is enabled by default. Printer Memory This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the device. The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the device can accept. The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the device memory. Printer Hard Disk When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the print driver. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. NOTE A printer hard disk is not available for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Do not select the Installed setting. Job storage When Job Storage is enabled, the device can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel. Mopier Mode The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier. HP unidrivers for Windows The HP LaserJet 5200 supports the transmit-once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled. When you use the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, or PS Emulation Unidriver, mopying is performed in one of two ways: either through the software or through the device hardware. When the mopier is enabled, mopying takes place through the device hardware by default. One copy of a multiplepage print job is transmitted once through the network to the device, together with a printer job language (PJL) command directing the device to make the specified number of copies. 260 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW When you disable the mopier, you are not necessarily disabling mopying, which the driver can still perform through the software rather than the device hardware (the mopying path that is disabled when you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, a multiple-copy print job that is sent when the mopier is disabled loses the advantage of transmitting the print job once, because the job is sent through the network for each copy. Mopier mode and collation Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. Mopying, the ability to send original print jobs to the device, is performed by the print driver. Collating can be controlled by either the print driver or the document software program. The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to Disabled. Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the Advanced tab. You can clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count option is set to more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation. To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected. The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings; the last column, "Expected result", shows how a 3-page print job would appear. Table 5-5 Driver mopier mode and collation settings Mopier mode Application collation Driver collation Expected result Disabled Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated Disabled Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated Disabled Selected Not selected 3 copies collated Disabled Selected Selected 3 copies collated Enabled Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated Enabled Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated Enabled Selected Not selected 3 copies collated Enabled Selected Selected 3 copies collated Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript passthrough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript driver. Options such as Watermarks, n-up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from some software programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send postscript information to the printer that cannot be controlled by the driver. Other programs might print using these options without problems. Select Disabled and print the document again if you encounter problems. NOTE In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough can cause unexpected results within a software program. ENWW Device Settings tab features 261 HP unidrivers for Windows Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) JPEG Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only) The JPEG Passthrough setting contains the following options: ● Disable. When this option is selected, images sent as JPEG are printed as bitmaps, resulting in faster printing. ● Enable. When this option is selected, images sent as JPEG are printed as JPEG (JPEG passthrough). ● Auto. When this option is selected, the printer connection type is automatically detected. For network (TCP/IP) connections, JPEG passthrough is disabled. For parallel (LTP), DOT4, and USB connections, JPEG passthrough is enabled. HP unidrivers for Windows 262 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW About tab features The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the print driver Properties, click Start on the MS Window task bar, select Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 1. Click Start. 2. Select Settings. 3. Click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home). 4. Right-click the device name. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the About tab. HP unidrivers for Windows The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components. The information varies according to the HP LaserJet 5200 model number, driver, date, and versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure. Figure 5-23 About tab ENWW About tab features 263 The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined. HP unidrivers for Windows 264 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Macintosh Macintosh 6 Introduction The HP LaserJet 5200 comes with printing software and installers for Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh operating systems. Topics: ENWW ● Macintosh printing-system software ● Macintosh install and uninstall instructions ● Macintosh HP Printer Utility ● Macintosh remote firmware updates ● Macintosh, print print-ready documents Introduction 265 Macintosh Macintosh printing-system software The HP LaserJet 5200 printing system for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center (Mac OS X V10.2.8) or the Printer Setup Utility (Mac OS X V10.3 or later) and HP-created postscript printer definition (PPD) and printer dialog extension (PDE) files. The driver uses these files to determine the features and postscript commands that the device supports. Bidirectional support in Bonjour/Rendezvous connections supports autoconfiguration of the software. The following are components that can be installed: ● The HP LaserJet Installer for Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later ● LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X) ● The HP Printer Selector (for Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later) ● Install notes Topics: ● System requirements ● Operating-system support ● Availability System requirements ● PowerPC processor ● Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later, with 128 MB RAM and 160 MB of available hard-disk space ● CD-ROM drive or internet connection Operating-system support Topics: ● Mac OS X ● Mac OS X Classic (Mac OS 9) Mac OS X The HP LaserJet 5200 is supported by Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later. Mac OS X Classic (Mac OS 9) Mac OS X Classic (Mac OS 9) does not support the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Availability This document provides information about the availability of the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available from HP fulfillment centers. Topics: ● 266 Printing-system software on the Web Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW In-box printing-system software CDs Printing-system software on the Web All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web. Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers an option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases. NOTE This document describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This document does not describe any drivers that might be released for use by support personnel. Topics: ● Printing-system software ● Software component availability Printing-system software The HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software is available for download at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/lj5200_software Software component availability The following HP LaserJet software components are available: ● PPD files for Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later ● PDE files for Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later ● HP Printer Utility In-box printing-system software CDs The software CD for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer contains the files for installing the printing-system software on the computer. Topics: ● Macintosh partition ● CD versions Macintosh partition The HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD is divided into two partitions, one for each of the following operating systems: ENWW ● MS Windows ● Macintosh Macintosh printing-system software 267 Macintosh ● Macintosh The Macintosh printing-system software files are grouped by language and reside in the following directories: ● Mac OS X (the HP LaserJet Installer) ● PDF (manuals) CD versions The software CD for the HP LaserJet 5200 contains the files for installing the printing-system software on the computer. NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD. The HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD is available in five versions, each of which contains printing-system software in various languages, as follows: ● ● ● 268 CD AM – Americas and Europe (part number Q7533-60101): ● CA = Catalan (Català) ● DE = German (Deutsch) ● EN = English ● ES = Spanish (Español) ● FR = French (Français) ● IT = Italian (Italiano) ● NL = Dutch (Nederland) ● PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português) CD WE – Western Europe (part number Q7533-60102): ● DA = Danish (Dansk) ● EN = English ● FI = Finnish (Suomi) ● HE = Hebrew ● NO = Norwegian (Norsk) ● SV = Swedish (Svenska) CD NE – Northern Europe, Arabic, and Russian (part number Q7533-60103): ● AR = Arabic ● EN = English ● EL = Greek ● FR = French (Français) Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ● ENWW RU = Russian (Russ) ● TR = Turkish (Turkçe) Macintosh ● ● CD EE – Eastern Europe (part number Q7533-60104): ● CS = Czech (Cesky) ● EN = English ● HU = Hungarian (Magyar) ● PL = Polish (Polski) ● SK = Slovak CD AS – Asia (part number Q7533-60105): ● EN = English ● ID = Indonesian (Bahasa) ● JA = Japanese ● KO = Korean ● TH = Thai ● ZHCN = Simplified Chinese ● ZHTW = Traditional Chinese Macintosh printing-system software 269 Macintosh Macintosh install and uninstall instructions The HP LaserJet 5200 printer comes with software and installers for MS Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems support the HP LaserJet 5200 printer, and software is available on the Web. This document provides procedures for installing and removing the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software for Macintosh operating systems. Topics: ● Macintosh component descriptions ● Install the Macintosh printing system ● Uninstall the Macintosh printing system Macintosh component descriptions The device includes the following software for Macintosh computers: ● PPDs for Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later ● PDEs for Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later) Topics: ● HP LaserJet PPDs ● PDEs ● HP Embedded Web Server ● Install notes ● Online help ● Screen fonts HP LaserJet PPDs In Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/ Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder. The PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the device features and allow the computer to communicate with the device. A print setup tool for the PPDs is provided on the printing-system software CD. For information about the print setup tools in various Macintosh operating systems, see Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems. PDEs Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later only) that provide access to device features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings. 270 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Mac OS X supports the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS). Use the HP Printer Utility to control the features that are not available in the driver. Use the HP EWS to perform the following tasks: ● Name the device, assign it to a zone on the network, and change device settings. ● Set a password for the device. ● From the computer, lock out functions on the device control panel to prevent unauthorized access (see the printing-software help). Install notes This text file contains important information about device features, instructions for installing the printingsystem software, and technical assistance. Online help This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with Mac OS 9.x HP devices. The help system is in English only, and can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center. Screen fonts The printing-system software for Macintosh operating systems no longer includes a font installer. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer uses previously installed system fonts when it is installed on a Macintosh computer. Install the Macintosh printing system On a Macintosh computer, the installation procedures are basically the same for a network administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the printer. NOTE If the computer is connected to the printer by an EtherTalk connection, use Bonjour/ Rendezvous (or AppleTalk) to configure the network control panel for the correct connection to communicate with the device. You must set up the HP LaserJet 5200, connect it to the computer or network, and turn it on before the software is installed. Macintosh operating systems do not support parallel connections. The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the appropriate language for the operating system that is being used, and then use the installer program for that language. Topics: ENWW ● General installation for Macintosh operating systems ● Detailed Mac OS X installation ● Printer setup Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 271 Macintosh HP Embedded Web Server General installation for Macintosh operating systems Macintosh 1. Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive. NOTE If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the hp LaserJet 5200 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window. 2. Double-click the Mac OS X icon. NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the "admin" password in the Authenticate dialog box. 3. The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation. NOTE When you are installing the printing-system software, be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled. 4. When software installation is complete, click Quit. 5. Continue with the steps for setting up a printer. The software program that you use to finish setting up the printer varies by operating system. The following table shows the print setup tools that are available. Table 6-1 Adding a printer in Macintosh operating systems Operating System Print Center Mac OS X V10.2.8 x Mac OS X V10.3.9 Mac OS X V10.4.1 Printer Setup Utility x x x Detailed Mac OS X installation Topics: ● Main Install dialog box sequence Main Install dialog box sequence This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy Install (the typical installation option). Insert the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD in the CD-ROM drive. If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, double-click the hp LaserJet 5200 CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder. 272 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Figure 6-1 hp LaserJet 5200 CD-ROM icon The hp LaserJet Software dialog box opens. Figure 6-2 hp LaserJet Software screen In the hp LaserJet Software pane, double-click the Mac OS X folder to open it. In the Mac OS X folder, double-click the HP LaserJet v.5.5.0.040 icon. This begins the install process. Figure 6-3 HP LaserJet v.5.7 icon The Authenticate dialog box appears. ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 273 Macintosh Figure 6-4 Authenticate dialog box Type the correct “admin” password and click OK to continue. The installer startup screen appears. Click Cancel to exit the installation. Figure 6-5 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer startup-screen dialog box Click Continue. The License dialog box appears. 274 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Figure 6-6 License dialog box Click Print… to open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and print a copy of the license agreement. Click Save As… to open the system Save dialog box and save the license agreement to disk. Click Decline to end the installation process and close the installer. Read the software-license agreement and then click Accept to continue the installation. The Easy Install dialog box appears. Figure 6-7 Easy Install dialog box ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 275 Macintosh The default option in the drop-down menu at the top of the screen is Easy Install. You can also select Custom Install in the same menu. Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system. Figure 6-8 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install) Click Select All to install all of the options that are available on the printing-system software CD, or use the check boxes on the list to install the components that you want to install. Click the I icon to the right of each item in the list to open a pop-up screen that describes the component. Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. The files are installed in the Library folder on the Macintosh CD. Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system. Figure 6-9 Installing dialog box The Installing dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process. When installation is complete, the LASERJET README.RTF file opens and the LaserJet ReadMe.rtf icon appears on the desktop. Follow these instructions to set up a printer queue for your HP LaserJet 5200 printer. 276 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Figure 6-10 LaserJet ReadMe icon A pop-up message stating that the installation was successful also appears. Figure 6-11 Installation success message Click Quit to exit the installer. Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer. Printer setup After installing the printing-system software in Macintosh operating systems, the printer must be set up. Topics: ● Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 ● Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3 Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 1. In the Applications folder, open the Utilities Folder, and then run the Print Center or the Printer Setup Utility. 2. The Printer List appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-12 Printer list screen ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 277 3. Macintosh Select the device and click Add. The Printer Browser screen appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-13 Printer Browser screen 278 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Click IP Printer to see printer information. The Printer Info screen appears. Macintosh 4. Figure 6-14 Installable Options screen 5. If the device has the optional 500-sheet tray 3, select HP 500-Sheet Input Tray in the Tray 3 dropdown menu. 6. In the Collation in Printer drop-down menu, select one of the following options, depending on your device configuration: ● Yes – Total RAM > 80 MB or Hard Disk NOTE A hard disk is not available for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. ● ENWW No – Total RAM < 80 MB and No Hard Disk 7. If the device has a duplex unit (a standard feature on the HP LaserJet 5200tn and the HP LaserJet 5200dtn models), select the Duplex Unit check box. 8. In the Printer Disk: drop-down menu, select the appropriate option: ● None ● RAM Disk Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 279 Macintosh NOTE A printer hard disk is not available for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Do not select the RAM Disk setting. 9. Select the Name & Location setting. The Name and Location screen appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-15 Name & Location screen 10. In the Printer Name field, type a name for the device. 11. In the Location field, type a name for the device. 12. Click Apply Changes to save the information in the Name & Location screen. 13. After you have selected the settings in the Installable Options screen, click Continue. The Printer Browser screen shows the following tabs: 280 ● Default Browser ● IP Printer Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Figure 6-16 Printer Browser screen – Default Browser tab 14. In the Name: field, type a name for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. 15. In the Location: field, type the device location. 16. In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options: ● Auto Select (This is the default setting.) ● Generic PostScript Printer ● Other (Select the appropriate brand name.) 17. Click Add to save the settings. ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 281 Macintosh 18. If you want to search for additional printers, click More Printers. The Printer Browser search dialog box opens. Figure 6-17 More Printers screen 19. Use the drop-down menus to change the search settings. Select the printer that you want to install and click Add. To cancel the search, click Cancel. 282 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh 20. To connect the printer through its TCP/IP address, click the IP Printer tab. Figure 6-18 IP Printer tab 21. In the Search field in the upper-right corner, select one of the following options: ● All (this is the default setting) ● AppleTalk ● Bonjour ● FireWire®. NOTE This feature is not supported in the Macintosh environment. ● Open Directory NOTE This feature is not supported in the Macintosh environment. ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 283 Macintosh ● Shared ● USB 22. In the Protocol: drop-down menu, select one of the following options: ● Internet Printing Protocol – IPP NOTE This feature is not supported in the Macintosh environment. ● Line Printer Daemon – LPD ● HP Jet Direct – Socket NOTE This feature is not supported in the Macintosh environment. 23. If you know the host name or TCP/IP address of the device, type it in the Address: field. (It might also be available on the drop-down menu.) 24. If you know the queue path of the printer, type it in the Queue: field. NOTE The queue name for a TCP/IP address in the Macintosh environment should be specified as a binary postscript (BINPS) queue. 25. In the Name: field, type a name for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. 26. In the Location: field, type the device location. 27. In the Print Using: field, select one of the following options: ● Auto Select (This is the default setting.) ● Generic PostScript Printer NOTE If this setting is selected instead of the device-specific setting, the driver might not provide full functionality. ● 284 Other (Select the appropriate brand name.) Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh 28. Click Add to save the settings. The device name appears in the Printer List. Figure 6-19 Printer List screen 29. Highlight the printer name and click the Utility icon to open the Select Printer screen and verify that the device has been installed. Figure 6-20 Select Printer screen Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3 ENWW 1. In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility. 2. Click Printers, and then click Add Printer (Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later). 3. When the New Printer drivers detected pop-up box appears, click OK. 4. From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for the device. Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 285 5. Macintosh Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for the device. For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select the device zone; or if you are using IP Printing, type a TCP/IP address in the Printer Address field. In the Printer Model drop-down menu, select HP. In the Model Name drop-down menu, select HP LaserJet 5200. NOTE If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a .PPD file, click the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then select the .PPD file that you want to add. 6. Click Add. The HP LaserJet 5200 printer appears in the Printer List. 7. To configure installable options in Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later, such as a duplexing unit or optional paper trays, click Show Info? and select Installable Options in the drop-down menu. NOTE This step is necessary only for USB connections and Rendezvous/Bonjour network connections. AppleTalk automatically configures the installable options. 8. Configure the options, click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog box. Uninstall the Macintosh printing system To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash. 286 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW The HP Printer Utility is a software program that gives you access to the device in Mac OS X. The HP Printer Utility is available only in Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later. The HP Printer Utility does not work when it is installed by using the AppleTalk protocol. Use IP, Bonjour or Rendezvous to enable the HP Printer Utility. Topics: ● Access to the HP Printer Utility ● Supplies Status ● Device Information ● File Upload ● Update Firmware ● Upload Fonts ● HP Support ● Duplex mode ● Economode ● Resolution ● Trays Configuration ● Lock Resources ● Stored Jobs ● E-mail Alerts ● Network Settings ● Bonjour Setting ● Additional Settings Access to the HP Printer Utility In Mac OS X V10.3, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility: 1. Open the Finder. 2. Find and double-click Printers. The Select Printer screen appears. In Mac OS X V10.4, follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility: ENWW 1. Click Go. 2. Click Utilities. 3. Double-click HP Printer Selector. The Select Printer screen appears. Macintosh HP Printer Utility 287 Macintosh Macintosh HP Printer Utility Macintosh Figure 6-21 Select Printer screen – printer not selected If the device does not appear, click More Printers…. The Connection Type screen appears, as shown in the following figure. Figure 6-22 Connection Type screen Select the connection type (USB, TCP/IP, or AppleTalk). The device name appears under Model Name, as shown in the preceding figure. 288 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh On the Connection Type screen, click Add. The Select Printer screen appears, showing printer information. To open the HP Printer Utility directly, select the printer and click Launch Utility. Figure 6-23 Select Printer screen – printer selected On the Select Printer screen, click Settings… to open the Device Status screen in the HP EWS. To open the HP Printer Utility, select the device and click Launch Utility. If the HP Printer Utility software detects a condition that might need attention, the Printer Status screen appears. Figure 6-24 Printer Status screen ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 289 Address the condition and click OK to close the screen. The HP Printer Utility opens. Macintosh The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP Printer Utility. Supplies Status The HP Printer Utility opens to the Current Supplies Levels screen. Figure 6-25 Current Supplies Levels screen Click Detailed Supplies Information… to open the Supplies Information screen. 290 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Figure 6-26 Supplies Information screen Use the scroll button to see information about the print cartridges. If you have Internet access and click Order HP Supplies(see Figure 6-25 Current Supplies Levels screen), a screen appears that explains the ordering process and describes the kind of information that can be sent about your device to facilitate the ordering of supplies. ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 291 Macintosh Figure 6-27 Order Supplies link Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy statement. You can continue ordering supplies without sending device information by clicking the continue without sending this information link. To send a message to HP, click the contact hp link. On the Supplies Status screen, click Media to see the status of the trays. 292 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Figure 6-28 Paper Status screen You can also order supplies from this screen by clicking Order HP Supplies. Device Information Click Device Information in the menu on the left to find the device service ID (if assigned), the firmware version, and the serial number. Figure 6-29 Device Information screen The device configuration page shows other settings; click View Configuration Page to see it. ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 293 Macintosh Click the printer icon in the lower-left corner to see information about another installed printer. This action relaunches the HP Printer Utility so that you can select another printer (see Figure 6-21 Select Printer screen – printer not selected). File Upload On the Configuration Settings menu, click File Upload to open the File Upload screen. Figure 6-30 File Upload screen The File Upload command is supported for file types that can be sent directly to the printer without first being opened through a software program. Some files can be uploaded to the device, but some cannot. Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line. That is, they do not need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format (such as the Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader programs for .PDF files), but can be sent directly to the device by using the File Upload command. ● HP LaserJet printer command language (.PCL) ● Portable document format (.PDF) ● Postscript (.PS) ● Text (.TXT) On the File Upload screen, click Choose… to open a navigation screen. Locate the file you want to upload and click Open. On the File Upload screen, click Display response from the device to see whether the upload was successful. If the file loads successfully, no message appears. On the navigation screen, select the file and click Open. The file name appears in the File Upload screen of the HP Printer Utility. Click Upload. 294 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Update Firmware Select Update Firmware to locate a firmware upgrade file and install it on the device. The Update Firmware screen is shown in the following figure. Figure 6-31 Update Firmware screen Click Choose to open a navigation screen. Browse to the firmware file and click Open. The Update Firmware screen shows the file name. Click Update. Upload Fonts In the Information and Support menu, click Upload Fonts to gain access to fonts that you can upload to the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 295 Macintosh Figure 6-32 Upload Fonts screen The drop-down menu in the Upload Fonts pane has the following options: ● Memory. Fonts that are available in the printer memory are listed. ● Disk. Select this option to shows any fonts that are installed on a flash disk. By default, no fonts are stored on either of these disks. To upload fonts, select the font name and click Add HP Support Click HP Support to open the HP Online Support screen. Figure 6-33 HP Online Support screen 296 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh If you have Internet access, you can connect to HP support pages over the Web from this screen. Click the Instant Support screen to open the HP Instant Support Web page. Figure 6-34 HP Instant Support link Click the Hewlett-Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy statement. Click the Product Support link if you do not want to send information to HP but would like to receive generic product support. Click Continue to open a page where you can select the device and find further information about product support. Click Cancel to return to the HP Online Support screen in the HP Printer Utility. On the HP Online Support screen, click Order Supplies Online to open the Order Supplies Web page (see Figure 6-27 Order Supplies link). The Online Registration link is not available at this time. Duplex mode For the HP LaserJet 5200tn and HP LaserJet 5200dtn printer models, the Configuration Settings menu includes a Duplex Mode setting. Click this setting to open the Duplex Mode screen, as shown in the following figure. ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 297 Macintosh Figure 6-35 Duplex Mode screen Select the Enable Duplex Mode check box to print internal diagnostic and test pages on both sides of the page. 1. Select Duplex Mode to open the Duplex Mode screen. 2. Select the Enable Duplex Mode check box. This box is clear by default. 3. Click Apply Now to enable printing on both sides of the page. Economode Under Printer Settings, Select the Economode and Toner Density menu item to open the Economode screen, as shown in the following figure. 298 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Figure 6-36 Economode screen Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page. However, it also reduces print quality. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs. HP does not recommend the full-time use of Economode. If Economode is used full-time when the average toner coverage is significantly less than 5%, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances, you must install a new print cartridge, even if toner remains in the cartridge. NOTE The EconoMode setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed. HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts as well as the quantity of toner. If the Economode setting is used frequently, the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply of toner is depleted, increasing the risk of toner leaking. Use genuine HP parts to avoid this problem. Change the settings in the Toner Density drop-down menu to save on toner use. The following settings are available: Lower settings result in slightly reduced printing quality, but save on toner usage. Resolution Under Printer Settings, select Resolution to open the Resolution screen, as shown in the following figure. ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 299 Macintosh Figure 6-37 Resolution screen The following dots-per-inch (dpi) settings are available in the Resolution drop-down menu: ● 300 ● 600 ● FASTRES 1200 ● PRORES 1200 NOTE When a PRORES1200 setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on the FASTRES 1200 setting, which uses a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi. When the PRORES 1200 setting is selected, documents are printed using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi. This is the best print quality, but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on the FASTRES 1200 setting, which uses a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi The following settings are available in the REt Level drop-down menu: ● OFF ● LIGHT ● MEDIUM ● DARK Trays Configuration Under Printer Settings, select Trays Configuration to open the Trays Configuration screen, as shown in the following figure. 300 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Figure 6-38 Trays Configuration screen 1. Select Trays Configuration to change media size and type for each of the trays installed on your device. 2. To change the media size, select a tray and then select a different media size in the Default Media Size drop-down menu. 3. To change the media type, select a tray and then select a different media type in the Default Media Type drop-down menu. 4. Click Apply Now to save the settings. Lock Resources Select Lock Resources to lock certain features of the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. The Lock Resources screen is shown in the following figure. ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 301 Macintosh Figure 6-39 Lock Resources screen In Control Panel Access Level, select one of the following settings: ● No Locking provides full control of the device. ● Minimal Locking provides control over paper-handling features. ● Moderate Locking blocks changes in the device configuration. ● Maximal Locking prevents users from changing device control-panel settings. In the lower pane, select the Lock check box for the mass-storage unit that you want to lock. WARNING! Click Initialize selected mass-storage unit only if you want to erase all data that is currently stored on the hard drive. You cannot undo this action. Stored Jobs Select Stored Jobs to change the Enable Job Storing setting. This setting is selected by default. Click to clear the check box to disable the job-storing feature. 302 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Figure 6-40 Enable Job Storing screen You can type a PIN for your job in the Enter Secure Job PIN field. Select the number of copies in the Copies to Print field. Select a stored job and click Print to print the job. Select a stored job and click Delete to delete the job. For information about releasing and deleting stored jobs at the device control panel, see Releasing a job-storage print job. E-mail Alerts Select E-mail Alerts to configure the HP LaserJet 5200 printer to send e-mail notifications to users. If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from the IT administrator. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 303 Macintosh Figure 6-41 E-mail Alerts screen Click Open E-mail Alerts Settings to open the HP EWS. The HP EWS opens to the Setup screen on the Alerts tab, where you can set notifications to manage the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Network Settings Select Network Settings to open the IP Settings screen. Figure 6-42 IP Settings screen 304 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ● DHCP ● BootP ● Manual Macintosh Select one of the following options in the Configuration drop-down menu: You can also use this screen to modify the following settings: ● Host Name ● IP Address ● Subnet Mask ● Default Gateway To save new settings, click Apply Now. To view and change other network settings, click Additional Network Settings. If a user name and password have been set, you might need to obtain them from your IT administrator. For more information, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. The HP EWS opens to the Network Settings screen. For information about this screen, see Networking tab in this STR. Bonjour Setting Select Bonjour Settings to open the Bonjour Settings screen. Bonjour is enabled by default. To disable Bonjour, click to clear the Enable Bonjour check box and then click Apply Now. Figure 6-43 Bonjour Settings screen ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 305 The following options are available in the The highest priority service drop-down menu: Macintosh ● Port 9100 (default) ● IPP ● LPD-RAW ● LPD-TEXT ● LPD-AUTO ● LPD-BINPS ● LPD-Queue5 ● LPD-Queue6 ● LPD-Queue7 ● LPD-Queue8 ● LPD-Queue9 ● LPD-Queue10 After you select a new setting, click Apply Now to save it. Additional Settings Select Additional Settings to gain access to the HP EWS. Figure 6-44 Additional Settings screen To open the HP EWS, click Open Embedded Web Server. 306 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 307 Macintosh For information about HP EWS settings, see HP Embedded Web Server or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. Macintosh Macintosh remote firmware updates Topics: ● Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection ● Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection If the HP LaserJet 5200 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update the firmware. Complete the following steps: 1. Make a note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware . 2. Open a Terminal window on the computer. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the Applications/Utilities folder. 3. Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS> For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP 192.168.0.90 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter. 6. Type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put /username/desktop/5200fw.RFU, and then press Enter. NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/5200FW.RFU". To ensure that the entire path to the .RFU file is placed in the put command, type put and a space, and then drag and drop the .RFU file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command. 7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. 8. 308 Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Macintosh Remote firmware update by using the HP Printer Utility Make sure that you have the tools and files that are necessary for the update. You will need the HP Printer Utility and the 5200FW.RFU file, which is the firmware file for the device. The HP Printer Utility is a software program that is available only for Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later. The HP Printer Utility can be found on the HP LaserJet 5200 printing-system software CD-ROM that came with the device. If you do not have the CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP Printer Utility by downloading the latest device installer from www.hp.com/go/lj5200_software. The firmware file (5200FW.RFU) can be downloaded from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/lj5200_firmware After you have the firmware file and the HP Printer Utility, you are ready to begin the update process. Complete the following steps: 1. Open the HP Printer Utility. 2. Select Update Firmware, click Choose, browse to firmware upgrade file, and then click Open. 3. On the Update Firmware screen, click Update. NOTE You might receive an error message on the screen indicating that the printer is offline. Verify that the printer is turned on. If it is, ignore the message. The Updating screen appears and the update proceeds as expected. 4. The update process can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. 5. ENWW Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Macintosh remote firmware updates 309 Macintosh Macintosh, print print-ready documents If the HP LaserJet 5200 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a printready file. Complete the following steps: 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware . 2. Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer hard drive in the following folder: System/Applications/Utilities/Terminal 3. Type FTP <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following: FTP 192.168.0.90 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter. 6. You can drag and drop the print-ready file into the Terminal folder (System/Applications/Utilities/ Terminal). Alternatively, you can type put <path>, where <path> is the location where the printready file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type the following: put /username/desktop/5200FW.PDF NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/5200FW.PDF" To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put command, type put and a space, and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The complete path to the file is automatically placed after the put command. 7. 310 Press Enter to print the document. Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Engineering Details Engineering Details 7 Introduction Topics: ENWW ● File to E-mail utility ● Media attributes ● Remote firmware updates ● Printing print-ready documents ● Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems Introduction 311 File to E-mail utility The File to E-mail utility is a standalone Microsoft Foundation Class (MFC) program that reads an .INI file to detect where the HP LaserJet device software is installed. The program then attaches relevant log or history files to an e-mail that can be sent to HP Customer Support to assist troubleshooting. The utility runs on the computer, but does not interact with your HP LaserJet device. The tool is included on the installer CD, but is not copied to the computer during the software installation. HP Customer Support can also send the utility to you through e-mail or by posting it to an HP web page. The tool is compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP. Engineering Details The File to E-mail utility runs with any MAPI-compliant e-mail programs. It does not run with Web-based e-mail services such as Yahoo, Hotmail, or AOL. Depending on the speed of the computer, it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log files and attach them to an e-mail message. The File to E-mail utility consists of two files that are located on the HP LaserJet 5200 software CD: ● <CD-ROM drive>util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.exe ● <CD-ROM drive>util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.ini To use the File to E-mail utility, copy these files to the desktop, navigate to them in Explorer, and then double-click FileToEmail.exe to open the utility. The utility generates files, opens an e-mail message, and attaches the files so that you can send them to an IT administrator, as shown in the following figure. NOTE The figure is provided as an example only. The actual files attached will vary, depending on your device. Figure 7-1 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached 312 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Engineering Details If the File to E-mail utility fails for any reason (for instance, if you cancel the new message), all the files are copied to a folder on the desktop that is named CCC, possibly with strings of 0's attached to the end. You can zip these files and e-mail them separately. ENWW File to E-mail utility 313 Media attributes Topics: Engineering Details ● Media sources and destinations ● Media-source commands ● Driver-supported media sizes ● Driver-supported media types ● Custom paper sizes ● Media-type commands Media sources and destinations The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Table 7-1 HP LaserJet 5200 media sources and destinations Media sources Media destinations 100-sheet multipurpose tray (tray 1) Standard 250-sheet paper tray (tray 2) Standard 500-sheet paper tray (tray 3) Optional; standard on the HP LaserJet 5200dtn printer model Standard 250-sheet top bin Standard Media-source commands The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string" MediaSource. See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the command for tray 2. The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l1H is the command fortray 2. Table 7-2 Media-source commands Media source 314 PCL 6 PCL 5 PostScript ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string" MediaSource1 Esc&l#H /MediaPosition # / ManualFeed true | false or null Manual feed in tray 1 2 2 3 true Tray 1 (100-sheet) 3 4 3 false Tray 2 (250-sheet) 4 1 0 false Tray 3 (500-sheet) 5 5 1 false Automatically Select (HP unidrivers) NA NA NA Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Media source Automatically Select (HP traditional PCL drivers) or Printer Auto Select (HP unidrivers) 1 PCL 6 PCL 5 PostScript ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string" MediaSource1 Esc&l#H /MediaPosition # / ManualFeed true | false or null 7 1 null false For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2" MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for tray 2. Driver-supported media sizes The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the device and operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers. Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes Paper sizes1 Width Height PCL 6 2 Letter 216 mm 279 mm "LETTER" (8.5 inches) (11.0 inches) 279 mm 216 mm (11 inches) 8.0 inches 140 mm 216 mm (5.5 inches) (8.5 inches) 269 mm 391 mm (10.6 inches) (15.4 inches) 259 mm 368 mm (10.2 inches) (14.5 inches) 273 mm 394 mm (10.75 inches) (15.5 inches) 184 mm 260 mm (7.24 inches) 10.24 inches) 195 mm 197 mm (7.68 inches) (7.75 inches) 273 mm 197 mm (10.75 inches) (7.75 inches) 216 mm 330 mm (8.5 inches) (13 inches) Letter-R Statement 8K 8K 8K 16K 16K 16K 8.5 x 13 ENWW "STATEMENT" “ROC8K” "ROC16K" "8.5x13" Media attributes 315 Engineering Details Table 7-2 Media-source commands (continued) Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes (continued) Paper sizes1 Width Height PCL 6 2 11 x 17 279 mm 432 mm “LEDGER” (11.0 inches) (17.0 inches) 305 mm 457 mm 12.0 inches) (18.0 inches) 297 mm 419 mm (11.7 inches) (16.5 inches) 211 mm 297 mm (8.3 inches) (11.69 inches) 147 mm 211 mm (5.8 inches) (8.3 inches) 105 mm 148 mm (4.14 inches) (5.83 inches) 257 mm 363 mm (10.1 inches) (14.3 inches) 183 mm 257 mm (7.2 inches) (10.1 inches) 128 mm 182 mm (5.1 inches) (7.2 inches) 305 mm 430 mm (12.0 inches) (16.93 inches) 100 mm 148 mm (3.94 inches) (5.83 inches) 100 mm 200 mm (3.94 inches) (7.87 inches) 148 mm 200 mm (5.83 inches) (7.87 inches) 105 mm 241 mm (4.13 inches) (9.5 inches) 176 mm 250 mm (6.93 inches) (9.84 inches) 162 mm 229 mm (6.38 inches) (9.02 inches) 110 mm 220 mm (4.33 inches) (8.66 inches) 12 x 18 A3 Engineering Details A4 A5 A6 B4 (JIS) B5 (JIS) B6 RA3 S Postcard (JIS) D Postscard (JIS) D Postscard (JIS) Envelope #10 Envelope B5 Envelope C5 Envelope DL 316 Chapter 7 Engineering Details “12x18” “A3” "A4" "A5" “A6” “JIS B4” "JIS B5" “B6” “RA3” "JPOSTD" “Double Postcard (JIS)” "COM10" "B5 ENV" "C5" "DL" ENWW Table 7-3 Supported media sizes and attributes (continued) Paper sizes1 Width Height PCL 6 2 Envelope Monarch 99 mm 190 mm "MONARCH" (3.88 inches) (7.5 inches) 185 mm 267 mm (7.3 inches) (10.5 inches) 216 mm 330 mm (8.5 inches) (13.0 inches) 216 mm 356 mm (8.5 inches) (14.0 inches) Minimum: Minimum: 127 mm 76.2 mm (5.0 inches) (3.0 inches) Maximum: Maximum: 215.9 mm 355.6 mm (8.5 inches) (14.0 inches) Executive (JIS) Legal Custom 1 2 3 "EXEC" "JISEXEC" Engineering Details Executive "LEGAL" 3 For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch. The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String." For custom sizes, the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8 by 9 inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0 9.0 CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits." Driver-supported media types The following table shows the media types that the HP LaserJet 5200 print-drivers support. Table 7-4 Supported input media types ENWW Media types (command string) Tray 1/top bin/stacker bin Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500sheet) Duplexing unit Manual duplexing Unspecified Y Y Y Y Y Plain (60–199 g/m2, or 16–53 lb) Y N N N Y Plain (60–120 g/m2, or 16–32 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Preprinted (60–120 g/ m2, or 16–32 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Letterhead (60–120 g/ m2, or 16–32 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Transparency (0.10– Y 0.14 mm thick, or 4.7 to 5 mils thick) Y Y N N Prepunched (60– 120 g/m2, or 16–32 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Media attributes 317 Table 7-4 Supported input media types (continued) Engineering Details 1 Media types (command string) Tray 1/top bin/stacker bin Tray 2 (250-sheet) Trays 3 (500sheet) Duplexing unit Manual duplexing Postcard (135–176 g/ m2, or 36–47 lb) Y N N N Y Labels (0.10–0.14 mm thick, or 4.7 to 5 mils thick) Y Y Y N N Bond (60–120 g/m2, or 16–32 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Recycled (60–120 g/ m2, or 16–32 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Color (60–120 g/m2, or 16–32 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Light (60–75 g/m2, or 16–20 lb) Y N N N Y Cardstock (135–176 g/ m2, or 36–47 lb) Y Y N N Y Rough Y N N N N Tough Paper1 (Glossy Film) (0.10–0.14 mm thick, or 4.7 to 5 mils thick) Y N N N N Envelope (75–90 g/m2, Y or 20–24 lb) N N N N Vellum (60–120 g/m2, or 16–32 lb) Y N N N N Custom (60–199 g/m2, or 16–53 lb) Y Y Y Y Y Use only HP LaserJet glossy media. Using HP Inkjet glossy media can cause permanent damage to the printer. Custom paper sizes The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose) Width 76 mm (3.0 inches) 312 mm (12.28 inches) Height 127 mm (5.0 inches) 470 mm (18.5 inches) Tray 2 (250-sheet) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 297 mm (11.7 inches) Height 210 mm (8.26 inches) 432 mm (17 inches) Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 297 mm (11.7 inches) Height 210 mm (8.26 inches) 432 mm (17 inches) Tray 3 (500-sheet, optional) 318 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Table 7-5 PCL 6 custom media sizes (continued) Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Duplexing unit Width 148.0 mm (5.83 inches) 297 mm (11.7 inches) Height 210.0 mm (8.26 inches) 432 mm (17 inches) The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters plus 1, for a total of 6. Table 7-6 Media-type commands 1 2 ENWW Esc& n# Wd Paper type Esc& 6 Wd Plain Esc& 11 Wd Preprinted Esc& 11 Wd Letterhead Esc& 13 Wd Transparency1 Esc& 11 Wd Prepunched Esc& 7 Wd Labels Esc& 5 Wd Bond Esc& 9 Wd Recycled Esc& 6 Wd Color Esc& 6 Wd Light Esc& 13 Wd Intermediate Esc& 6 Wd Heavy Esc& 11 Wd Cardstock2 Esc& 6 Wd Rough Esc& 12 Wd Tough Paper Esc& 9 Wd Envelope You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel. The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an uppercase "S". Media attributes 319 Engineering Details Media-type commands Remote firmware updates The HP LaserJet 5200 printer features remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing-system software and print drivers. The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps: Engineering Details 1. Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the device. 2. Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to the computer. 3. Download the new firmware to the device. Topics: ● Determining the current level of firmware ● Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site ● Downloading the new firmware to the device ● Printer messages during the firmware update ● Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser ● Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection ● Remote firmware update through a local MS Windows port ● Remote firmware update through a USB port ● Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network ● Remote firmware update for UNIX systems ● Remote firmware update by using the LPR command ● Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin Determining the current level of firmware To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page, follow these instructions. 320 (the select button; the one with the check mark) to open the menus. 1. Press 2. Press (the up arrow) and (select). 3. Press 4. Press 5. Look in the "Printer Information" section on the configuration page for the firmware date code. The firmware date code looks something like this: 20051002 07.000.0. (up) and (the down arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press (down) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION. (select) to print the configuration page. Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site The remote firmware update (.RFU) file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a selfextracting .EXE file. For detailed instructions about how to download the .EXE file, go to the following URL: www.hp.com/go/lj5200_firmware The .EXE file consists of a readme file and the .RFU file. Downloading the new firmware to the device For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to www.hp.com/support/ lj5200. The device can receive an RFU update when the device is in a READY state. The device waits for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update. NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets, and Web-access alerts. The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the device to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (parallel or network). The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the device, such as the number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed. Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed. Use one of the methods described in this manual to update the printer firmware. Printer messages during the firmware update The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update. Table 7-7 Troubleshooting a firmware update ENWW Cause Result The job was cancelled from the control panel. No update has occurred. A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example, the parallel cable was removed). No update has occurred. A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE process. No update has occurred. A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING UPGRADE process. No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel port. A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process. The update has been completed. Remote firmware updates 321 Engineering Details NOTE For UNIX systems, the remote firmware update file is a .TAR file. Print jobs that are sent to the device while an update is in process do not interrupt the update. All HP LaserJet devices leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote firmware update fails in an MS Windows operating system, the .RFU file must be resent. If a remote firmware update fails in a Macintosh operating system, contact support from an HP Customer Care Center. The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action required for each situation. Table 7-8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure Engineering Details Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action The .RFU file is corrupted. The device recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update. Download the file again and send the new file to the device. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/lj5200_firmware. The wrong device is contained in the .RFU file. The device recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update. Download the correct file and send it to the device. Download the file from www.hp.com/go/ lj5200_firmware. The upgrade was interrupted. See Table 7-9 Update messages. A flash hardware failure occurred. Although it is extremely unlikely, the device might have a hardware failure. Call technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the device for a local telephone support list). Three messages appear during a normal update process; a fourth (RESEND UPGRADE) appears only if the update process does not succeed. Table 7-9 Update messages Printer message Explanation RECEIVING UPGRADE This message appears from the time the device recognizes the beginning of an .RFU update until the time the device has verified the validity and integrity of the .RFU update. NOTE If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. No message appears on the device control panel to indicate that the update was interrupted. PERFORMING UPGRADE This message appears while the device is actually reprogramming the firmware. NOTE If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display. INITIALIZING 322 Chapter 7 Engineering Details This message appears from the time the device has finished reprogramming the DIMM until the device reinitializes. ENWW Table 7-9 Update messages (continued) Printer message Explanation RESEND UPGRADE This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the RFU process is interrupted. It can also occur if firmware for accessories (such as the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted. Perform another update by any means that is supported by the printer, regardless of the connection (network, parallel, or USB). RFU LOAD ERROR This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the print-engine firmware is corrupted. SEND RFU UPGRADE If this message appears, the update must now be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the device. NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed. Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser Complete the following steps to update the printer firmware by using file transfer protocol (FTP) through a browser. NOTE The following instructions can be used on MS Windows or Macintosh operating systems. 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO-Jetdirect page. The EIO-Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware 2. Open a browser window. 3. In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>, where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/ IP address of your device. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP:// 192.168.0.90 4. Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the device. 5. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon or onto any open space in the browser window. NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to enable the folder view. 6. ENWW a. Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab. b. Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites. c. Click OK to save the setting. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. Remote firmware updates 323 Engineering Details ON PARALLEL PORT NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. 7. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection Engineering Details If the HP LaserJet 5200 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update the firmware. Complete the following steps: 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware NOTE Before connecting to the device, make sure that the device is not in Powersave mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display. 2. Open a command window on the computer. 3. Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp 192.168.0.90. 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter. 6. When prompted for the password, press Enter. 7. Type bin at the command prompt. 8. Press Enter. The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window. 9. Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\5200FW.RFU, and then press Enter. NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type the following path: put "c:\My Documents\LJ\5200fw.rfu" The following series of messages appears in the command window: 200 PORT command successful 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection 226 Ready 226 Processing Job 226 Transfer complete 324 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears. 10. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. 11. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. 12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command. 13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the MS Windows interface. Remote firmware update through a local MS Windows port If the device is connected through a local port (parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the device by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window. Topics: ● Windows 98 or Windows Me ● Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Windows 98 or Windows Me 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: Mode lpt1:,,p NOTE If the device is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command. 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples: > LPT1 Not Rerouted > Resident portion of MODE loaded > Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out 3. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate device port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following: C:\>copy /b c:\5200fw.rfu lpt1 NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, typeC:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\5200fw.rfu" lpt1 ENWW Remote firmware updates 325 Engineering Details NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. Engineering Details 6. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. 7. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window. Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 The .RFU file can be sent directly to the device by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window. Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP LaserJet 5200 printer drivers, but it is possible to update the printer firmware in Windows NT 4.0. 1. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following: C:\>copy /b c:\5200fw.rfu lpt1 NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\5200fw.rfu" lpt1 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. 3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. 326 4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. 5. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window. Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Remote firmware update through a USB port If the device is connected over a USB connection, follow these instructions: 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME>\ \<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the device is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the device share name. For example, type the following: NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\5200fw.rfu" \\your_computer\clj3000 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen. 3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. 4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network If the device is shared on an MS Windows network, follow these instructions: 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \ \<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the device is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the device share name. For example, type the following: C:\>copy /b c:\5200fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\5200fw.rfu" \\your_server\your_computer ENWW 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen. 3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. Remote firmware updates 327 Engineering Details copy /b 3000fw.rfu\\your_computer\clj3000 NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. 4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Remote firmware update for UNIX systems Engineering Details For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .TAR file to the device is acceptable, including the following: 1. At the command prompt, type cp /home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>, where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .TAR file. 2. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. 3. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. Remote firmware update by using the LPR command NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command. 1. From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l <FILENAME> -OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>, where <IPADDRESS> can be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the device, and where <FILENAME> is the filename of the .RFU file. NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode. 328 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. 3. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW 4. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. 5. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window. Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later on the computer. Complete the following steps to update a single device through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site. 1. Start HP Web Jetadmin. 2. Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the device in the Quick Device Find field, and then click Go. The device Status window opens. 3. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder. 4. Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the device that you want to update in the list of devices, and click to select it. 5. Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update Printer Firmware from the choose action list. 6. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it. 7. Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server. 8. Refresh the browser. 9. Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu. 10. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the device. 11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update appear on the control panel. NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. 12. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update. ENWW Remote firmware updates 329 Engineering Details NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message. HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations. Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations. 1. Start HP Web Jetadmin. 2. Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps: a. Click Device Management, and then click All Devices. -orb. Shift-click to select devices that are to be included in the group, and then click OK. Engineering Details -orc. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK. 330 3. To modify several products in a group, click the group name, and then click Open. 4. The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll if necessary to view it. 5. In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type the appropriate information. Click Return to Device Group when finished. Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Printing print-ready documents ● HP LaserJet printer control language (.PCL) ● Portable document format (.PDF) ● Postscript (.PS) ● Text (.TXT) Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product. NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents. However, any print-ready file type can be substituted. Topics: ● Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser ● Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection ● Print-ready printing by using a local MS Windows port ● Print-ready file printing in an MS Windows network ● Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems ● Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser. NOTE The following instructions can be used on MS Windows or Macintosh operating systems. 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware . 2. Open a browser window. 3. In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address of your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following: FTP:// 192.168.0.90 ENWW 4. Locate the print-ready file for the product. 5. Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window. Printing print-ready documents 331 Engineering Details Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original application and printing it to a file, or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP LaserJet 5200 printer without first opening the original software program: NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to enable the folder view. 1. Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab. 2. Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites. 3. Click OK to save the setting. Engineering Details Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection If the HP LaserJet 5200 uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a printready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system: 1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the Configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware . 2. Open a command window on the computer. 3. Type ftp <TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type the following: ftp 192.168.0.90 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. 5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter. 6. When prompted for the password, press Enter. 7. Type bin at the command prompt. 8. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window. 9. Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed, including the path. For example, type the following: put C:\LJ\5200FW.PDF NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\5200FW.PDF" The following series of messages appears in the command window: 200 PORT command successful 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection 226 Ready 226 Processing Job 10. Press Enter on the keyboard. 332 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW 11. The print-ready file prints. 12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command. 13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the MS Windows interface. Print-ready printing by using a local MS Windows port The procedure for printing directly by using a local MS Windows port depends on the operating system. ● Windows 98 or Windows Me ● Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 Engineering Details Topics: Windows 98 or Windows Me 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: Mode lpt1:,,p NOTE If the product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command. 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples: > LPT1 Not Rerouted > Resident portion of MODE loaded > Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out 3. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, at the c:\> command prompt, type the following: copy /b c:\5200FW.PDF lpt1 NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\5200FW.PDF" ENWW 4. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. 5. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window. Printing print-ready documents 333 Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window. 1. At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following: C:\>copy /b c:\5200FW.PDF lpt1 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. Engineering Details NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents \5200FW.PDF". The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. 3. At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window. Print-ready file printing in an MS Windows network If the product is shared on an MS Windows network, complete the following steps. 1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \ \<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example, type the following: C:\>copy /b c:\5200FW.PDF \\your_server\sharename NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\5200FW.PDF" \\your_server\sharename 2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel, and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen. Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable, including the following: At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>, where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file. Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command NOTE This direct printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. 334 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command. 1. Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see Determining the current level of firmware . 2. From a command window, type the following: where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file. NOTE The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode. ENWW 3. The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window. 4. Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window. Printing print-ready documents 335 Engineering Details lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME> Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems The following tables detail the software features that are available for each driver type and for operating system that supports the HP LaserJet 5200 printer. The printing-system drivers for Windows 98 and Windows Me are the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver, and PS Emulation Driver. The printing-system drivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are the new HP unidrivers, with a user interface look and feel that is consistent across the HP PCL 6 Unidriver, HP PCL 5 Unidriver, and PS Emulation Unidriver. NOTE HP LaserJet 5200 print driver features are supported in Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit) and Windows XP (both 32-bit and 64-bit) operating systems. Engineering Details HP LaserJet 5200 print driver features are supported in Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later, except as otherwise noted. Topics: 336 ● Job-stream output ● PJL/PJL Encoding ● Job tracking ● Connectivity/Printing ● Bidirectional communication ● HP Driver Preconfiguration ● Bundle support ● Tray and paper assignment ● Installable options ● Printer services ● UI features ● Help features ● Print Task Quick Sets ● Media sizes ● Media types ● Job storage ● Print quality and resolution ● Reordering Options ● Resizing options ● Color settings ● Watermarks ● Alternative source/paper type Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW ● Printing destination ● Finishing options and duplexing ● Other document options ● Font support ● Postscript-specific features Job-stream output Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL6 PCL 6 Postscript PCL 5 support PCL 5 PS Emulation x PS Emulation x PCL 6 support x x PCL 6 pass-through support x x Postscript 3 PCL 5 Engineering Details Table 7-10 Driver support for the job-stream output feature x x Postscript 1, 2 x x PJL/PJL Encoding Table 7-11 Printer Job Language (PJL) and PJL encoding Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript PJL support x x x x x x UTF-8 encoding for PJL (Unicode to 8-bit) x x x x x x Job tracking Table 7-12 Driver support for job tracking Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript .PRN file driver identification x x x x x ENWW PS Emulation x Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 337 Table 7-12 Driver support for job tracking (continued) Engineering Details Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Job accounting information x x x x x Job accounting enhancements (UUID) x x x x x Job accounting enhancements (color) x x x Reliable Time Services – born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x x x x Job Timestamp – born on date (PJL TIMESTAMP) x x x x x Born on date (PJL DMINFO) x x x x x Sending user name with every job x x x x x Driver hooks for job ticket consumption x x x Driver hooks for event extensions for UI control data x x x PS Emulation x Connectivity/Printing Table 7-13 Driver support for connectivity features Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Parallel (direct connect) x x x x x x Network – TCP/IP (wired) x x x x x x x Network – TCP/IP (wireless x x x x x x x USB (Direct Connect) through 7.1.2 Port Monitor (MS USB Print) (bidirectional) x x x x x USB (Direct Connect) through 1284.4 Port Monitor (HP DOT4 / 7.1.3 ) (bidirectional) x x x x x USB (Direct Connect) through x 1284.4 Port Monitor (MS DOT4 / 7.1.3) (bidirectional) – Windows XP only x x 338 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 6 Postscript PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 5 PS Emulation USB (Direct Connect) through 7.1.2 (Apple USB Print) (bidirectional) x USB (Direct Connect) through 1284.4 (HP CIA DOT4 / 7.1.3 ) (bidirectional) x Rendezvous x Engineering Details Table 7-13 Driver support for connectivity features (continued) Bidirectional communication Table 7-14 Driver support for the bidirectional communication features Operating System Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Autoconfiguration through EAC x x x x x Autoconfiguration through direct connect – parallel - LPT - DOT4 stack x x x x x Network – TCP/IP x x x x x PS Emulation Automatic Configuration (other than EAC) x Autoconfiguration through EAC over USB (DOT4) x x x x x Update Now x x x x x x x Language Monitor1 1 MasterMon is a pseudo-language monitor that is used for all HP LaserJet devices for the duplex communication channel with bidirectional communication devices. It inserts PJL commands into the job stream. It loads TCPMON for TCP/IP ports. HP Driver Preconfiguration Table 7-15 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x ENWW PS Emulation Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 339 Table 7-15 Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration (continued) Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Feature lockout x x x x x Continuous export x x x x x PS Emulation Engineering Details Bundle support Table 7-16 Bundle support Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript x x x x PCL 5 PS Emulation Printer bundle in driver UI Bundle support through installer x x x PS Emulation Tray and paper assignment Table 7-17 Tray and paper assignment Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98 and Windows Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 Postscript Assign paper size to tray x x x PCL 5 PS Emulation x Installable options Table 7-18 Driver support for installable options Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Duplexing unit x x x x x x x Manual duplex enable x x x x x Total memory x x x x x 340 Chapter 7 Engineering Details x x x ENWW Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript x x x x x x x x x PCL 5 PS Emulation DWS (available memory) Additional source trays x x Font DIMM/compact flash support x x x Font DIMM Installer Engineering Details Table 7-18 Driver support for installable options (continued) x Mopier enabled x x x x x x x Job-storage feature enabled x x x x x x x Postscript passthrough x x Printer services Table 7-19 Printer services (Services tab) Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 Postscript Internet Services Links/Launch product support Web site x x x x Launch HP EWS features through TCP/IP port x x x x PCL 5 PS Emulation UI features Table 7-20 Driver support for UI features Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript UI tabs ("Panels" in Macintosh) x x x x x x x UI extensions x x x Page preview images x x x x x x Printer image bitmaps with hot spots x x Paper size dimensions x x ENWW x x Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 341 Table 7-20 Driver support for UI features (continued) Engineering Details Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Device settings notification x x x x x About … x x x x x x Accessibility/Disability (JAWS) x x x x x x Accessibility architecture x x x x x PS Emulation Help features Table 7-21 Driver support for Help features Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript What's this? Help (F1) x x x x x x Help button x x x x x x x Bubble Help MS Windows "?" Help x x x x x x Constraint Help x x x x x x Print Task Quick Sets Table 7-22 Driver support for Print Task Quick Sets Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Print Task Quick Sets x x x x x User Defined Quick Sets x x x x x 342 Chapter 7 Engineering Details PS Emulation x ENWW Media sizes Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Media Size selection x x x x x x x User-defined custom media x x x x x x x Custom media-size dialog through driver UI x x x x x x x Engineering Details Table 7-23 Driver support for media sizes Media types Table 7-24 Driver support for media types Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Media types appear in one list x x x x x x x User Defined Media Types x x x x x Combined Media Types & Sources in program. (Always ON, NO driver UI switch) x x x x Combined Media Types and sources in program (optional, driver UI switch) x x Combined Media Types and sources in program (in driver UI) Alternative Letterhead mode x x x x x x x Job storage Table 7-25 Driver support for the job-storage features Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Proof and hold x x x x x x x Private job x x x x x x x ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 343 Table 7-25 Driver support for the job-storage features (continued) Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Quick Copy x x x x x x x Job name x x x x x User name x x x x x x x PIN to print (for private jobs) x x x x x x x Job-storage pop-up x x x x Automatic job and user name x x x x x Job-storage override x x x x x Stored Job x Engineering Details x x x Print quality and resolution Table 7-26 Print-quality and resolution features Operating system Windows XP,Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Print-quality options x x x x x x x x x Print-quality – custom options recall Print optimizations x x Rendering mode (automatic) x Send graphics as vector x x Send graphics as raster x x Send page as raster x Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) PCL 5 Immediate Graphics Mode 344 Chapter 7 Engineering Details x x x x ENWW Reordering Options Table 7-27 Driver support for the reordering options Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Page order (based on output bin) x x x x x Page order (reordering for job) x x x PS Emulation x Engineering Details x Resizing options Table 7-28 Resizing options Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Print Document On x x x x x Scale to Fit x x x x x x % of Normal Size x x x x x x Rotate by 180 degrees x x x x x PS Emulation x x Color settings Table 7-29 Color settings Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Print in Grayscale x x x x x x x ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 345 Watermarks Table 7-30 Driver support for watermarks feature Engineering Details Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Watermarks on/off x x x x x x First page only x x x x x x Custom watermark definition x x x x x x Watermark angle x x x x x x Watermark font name x x x x x x Watermark font color x x x x x x Watermark font shading x x x x x x Watermark font size x x x x x x Watermark font style x x x x x x Locally defined watermarks x x x x x Alternative source/paper type Table 7-31 Driver support for the alternate source/paper type feature Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript All pages the same x x x x x x x Use different paper (UI control) x x x x x Front Cover (Blank Front Cover Inserted) x x x x x First Page x x x x x x Other pages x x x x x x Last Page x x x x x Back Cover – Blank Back Cover Inserted x x x x x 346 Chapter 7 Engineering Details x ENWW Printing destination Table 7-32 Driver support for the printing-destination feature Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 Postscript Paper Destinations x x x x x PS Emulation Engineering Details x Finishing options and duplexing Table 7-33 Duplexing Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Auto duplex/print on both sides x x x x x x x Manual duplex x x x x x Mixed duplex and simplex in single job x x x x x Long Edge/Short Edge (Flip On) x x x x x x x Pages per sheet (N-up) x x x x x x x Page borders on/off x x x x x x Page order (N-Up) x x x x x x Booklet Printing (layout through software) x x x x x x Booklet Target Size x x x x x x Other document options Table 7-34 Other document options Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript Orientation (portrait/landscape) x x x x x x x Number of copies x x x x x x x ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 347 Table 7-34 Other document options (continued) Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript x x x x x x x x x x x x PCL 5 PS Emulation Ignore application collation Collate x x x Collate – feature in driver UI Engineering Details Collate through mopy x x x Advanced printing features x x x Mirror image/mirror output x x x Font support Table 7-35 Font support Operating system Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003 Windows 98, Me Macintosh Driver type HP unidriver HP traditional driver Macintosh Driver PCL 6 PS Emulation PCL 6 PCL 5 PS Emulation Postscript x x x x x x x PCL 5 General device font support Font substitution x x Font DIMM (on/off) x x x x Send TrueType as Bitmap x x x x TrueType Fonts (UI option) Print Text as Black x x x x x x x x Postscript-specific features Table 7-36 Driver support for postscript-specific features Operating system Windows XP Windows 98, Me HP unidriver Postscript Driver PS Emulation Unidriver PS Emulation Driver Postscript memory x x Output protocol x x Send CTRL-D before each job x x Send CTRL-D after each job x x Convert gray text to postscript gray x 348 Chapter 7 Engineering Details Macintosh Postscript ENWW Table 7-36 Driver support for postscript-specific features (continued) Windows XP Windows 98, Me HP unidriver Macintosh Postscript Driver PS Emulation Unidriver PS Emulation Driver Convert gray graphics to postscript gray x Add euro currency symbol x Job timeout x x Wait timeout x x Minimum font size to download as outline x Minimum font size to download as bitmap x Postscript Engineering Details Operating system Printing Preferences Postscript Language Level x x Send postscript error handler x x Fit to Page x Output options Optimize for speed x x Optimize for portability x x Encapsulated postscript (EPS) x x Archive format x x Fit to Page x x Automatic x x Outline x x Bitmap x x Native TrueType x x TrueType font download option ENWW Driver-feature comparison in various operating systems 349 Engineering Details 350 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Index Symbols/Numerics % of Normal Size setting PCL traditional drivers 129 unidrivers 228 A About button PCL traditional drivers 157 PS Emulation Driver 174 About tab, unidrivers 263 accessibility documentation 18 drivers 341 accessories, automatic configuration 28 ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) compliance 18 Add Printer installation 82 Additional Drivers dialog box, Windows installation 78 Additional Software dialog box, Customization Wizard 94 Additional Software dialog box, Windows installation 73 Adobe Acrobat Reader installing 24 printing PDF files without 331 viewing documentation 17 Adobe Web site 169 Advanced Printing Features setting, unidrivers 204 Advanced tab, unidrivers 201 alerts, e-mail HP Embedded Web Server 41, 42 Macintosh 303 Alternative Letterhead Mode PCL traditional drivers 166 unidrivers 206 alternative source support 346 ENWW Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliance 18 application settings traditional drivers 103 unidrivers 195 ASCII output protocol, PS Emulation Unidriver 257 autoconfiguration, driver PCL traditional drivers 166 support for 28 unidrivers 259 autoconfiguration, Enterprise about 29 Windows support 29 automatic two-sided printing PCL traditional driver settings 115 PS Emulation Driver 173 unidrivers 235 autorun CD-ROM, Windows 23 availability, Windows software components 9 B Back button, Windows installation dialog boxes 57 Back Cover settings PCL traditional drivers 143, 146 unidrivers 217, 221 Back to Front printing, unidrivers 206 Basic Installation choosing 23 dialog boxes, Windows 59 Basics tab, PCL traditional drivers 155 bidirectional communication about 28 driver support 339 Enterprise AutoConfiguration 29 binary output protocol, PS Emulation Unidriver 257 binding settings PCL traditional drivers 118 unidrivers 238 bins custom paper sizes 140, 214 driver support 340 black, printing all text as PCL traditional drivers 124, 126 unidrivers 205 Bonjour Setting, Macintosh 305 booklet printing settings PCL traditional drivers 119 unidrivers 239 both sides, printing on PCL traditional driver settings 115 PS Emulation Driver 173 unidrivers 235 Browse for Printer dialog box, Customization Wizard 88 Bubble help 108 bundle support 340 C Cancel button, Windows installation dialog boxes 57 cardstock, paper type commands 319 CD-ROM directory structure, Macintosh 267 directory structure, Windows 10 documentation 17, 24 Index 351 installer, Windows printingsystem software 22 installing Macintosh printingsystem software 272 installing Windows printingsystem software 56 languages, Macintosh 268 languages, Windows 11 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box, Windows 71 Check Printer Connection dialog box, Windows 68 CHM files, viewing 18 Citrix Terminal Server support 9 collation settings PCL traditional drivers 162, 166 PS Emulation Driver 185 unidrivers 203, 261 color printing, driver support 345 command-line printing, Windows 331 command-line silent install for Windows 101 commands, paper size 317 source 314 type 319 common installer, features 24 components, software availability 9 Configuration Page, HP Embedded Web Server 40 Configuration section, HP Embedded Web Server 46 Configure Device page, HP Embedded Web Server 41, 42 Configure tab, PCL traditional drivers 159 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box, Windows 67 Confirm Network Settings dialog box, Windows 66 connectivity bidirectional communication support 28 driver support 338 features 6 352 Index Printer Connection dialog box, Windows 61 Searching dialog box, Windows 62 constraint messages PCL traditional drivers 107 unidrivers 199 context-sensitive help PCL traditional drivers 107 PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 199 continuous export 33 control panel settings traditional drivers 103 unidrivers 195 Copy Count settings PCL traditional drivers 156 PS Emulation Driver 173 unidrivers 203, 261 covers, use different paper settings PCL traditional drivers 143 unidrivers 217 Ctrl-D settings 193, 257 Custom Installation choosing 23 dialog boxes, Windows 59 Custom Installer Location dialog box, Windows Customization Wizard 96 custom paper sizes PCL traditional drivers 137, 318 PCL unidrivers 213, 318 customer support 39 Customization Wizard dialog boxes 83 D default Print Task Quick Sets PCL traditional drivers 111 unidrivers 209 default printer, setting 102 deleting job-storage jobs PCL traditional drivers 154 PS Emulation Driver 184 unidrivers 249 destinations, paper 314 device image 147 Device Information page, HP Embedded Web Server 38, 42 Device Installer Customization Wizard 83 Device Options tab, PS Emulation Driver 180 Device Services, unidrivers 251 Device Settings tab, unidrivers 252 Device Status page, HP Embedded Web Server 39 diagnostics 35, 250 Diagnostics section, HP Embedded Web Server 47 dialog boxes, printing-system software installation Mac OS X 272 Windows 59 Windows Customization Wizard 83 DIMMs, fonts PCL traditional driver settings 164 unidriver settings 255 direct printing FTP, Macintosh 310 FTP, Windows 332 local port, Windows 333 LPR 334 networks, Windows 334 UNIX 334 direct-connect installation 58 directory structure, software CDROM Macintosh 267 Windows 10 disabling driver features 33 disk space requirements Macintosh 266 Windows 7 Document Options PCL traditional drivers 114 unidrivers 204, 235 document preview image PCL traditional drivers 121, 129, 147, 157 unidrivers 222, 228, 241 documentation Help feature support 342 HP Embedded Web Server User Guide 19 ENWW HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 20 install notes 19 Print Task Quick Set for use guide, HP Traditional PCL traditional drivers 114 Print Task Quick Set for use guide, unidriver 211 User Guide 18 viewing 17, 24 double-sided printing PCL traditional driver settings 115 PS Emulation Driver 173 unidriver settings 235 downloading firmware 321 printing-system software 10 Driver Details dialog box, Customization Wizard 93 Driver Details dialog box, Windows 73 Driver Work Space (DWS) 166 drivers accessibility support 341 accessory configuration 28 Add Printer installation 82 availability by operating system 9 bidirectional communication support 339 bins supported 340 bundle support 340 color options 345 connectivity support 338 continuous export feature 33 destination support 347 diagnostics 35 Enterprise AutoConfiguration 29 finishing options 347 font support 348 Help feature support 342 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33, 339 included 25 installable options support 340 job stream output support 337 job tracking 337 ENWW job-storage support 343 Linux operating systems 8 lockable features 33, 301 Macintosh 266 media supported 314 network preconfiguration 31 paper source commands 314 paper supported 343 PJL encoding 337, 346 Point and Print installation 102 Postcript-specific features 348 Print Quality options 122 Print Task Quick Sets support 342 PS Emulation Driver features 168 quality settings 344 reordering options 345 resizing options support 345 Services support 341 settings 103, 195 standalone 8 tray assignment 340 UNIX operating systems 9 Update Now 30 user interface support 341 version numbers 26 watermarks support 346 See also PCL traditional drivers; PS Emulation Driver; unidrivers Drivers dialog box, Customization Wizard 92 Drivers dialog box, Windows 72 Duplex mode, HP Printer Utility, Macintosh 297 duplexing unit custom paper sizes 140, 214 media supported 317 models including 5 PCL traditional driver settings 115, 162 print modes 116 PS Emulation Driver settings 173, 188 testing Macintosh 297 unidriver configuration 259 unidriver settings 235 DWS (Driver Work Space) 166 E e-mail alerts HP Embedded Web Server 41, 42 Macintosh 303 E-mail Server page, HP Embedded Web Server 41 Easy Printer Care 36 EconoMode, unidrivers 223 Edit Other Links page, HP Embedded Web Server 41 Effects tab PCL traditional drivers 127 unidrivers 225 Embedded Jetdirect page, printing 38 embedded Web server. See HP Embedded Web Server Energy Star compliance 5 Enterprise AutoConfiguration about 29 Novell NetWare operating systems 30 Windows operating systems supported 29 envelopes, paper type commands 319 escape sequences paper source 314 paper type 319 Euro symbol 258 event log 38 EWS. See HP Embedded Web Server exporting driver parameters 33 External Fonts settings, PCL unidrivers 255 F features 4 File to E-mail utility 312 File Upload, Macintosh 294 Finish dialog box, Customization Wizard 101 Finish dialog box, Windows 80 finishing options 347 Finishing tab PCL traditional drivers 110 unidrivers 233 Index 353 Firewall Detected dialog box, Windows 63 firewalls dialog box, Windows 63 firmware determining current level 320 downloading 321 FTP updates, Windows 324 HP Web Jetadmin updates 329 LPR command updates 328 Macintosh updates 295, 308, 309 messages during update 321 troubleshooting updates 321 UNIX updates 328 updating remotely 320 verifying installation 323 Windows network updates 327 Windows, local port update 325 First Page paper settings PCL traditional drivers 144 unidrivers 218 Fit to Page settings PCL Traditional Drivers 128 PS Emulation Driver 185 Flip Pages Up PCL traditional drivers 118 unidriver settings 238 Font Substitution Table, PS Emulation Unidriver 254 fonts DIMM settings, PCL traditional drivers 164 DIMM settings, unidrivers 255 driver support 348 Euro symbol 258 External, PCL unidrivers 255 features 5 Macintosh 271 PS 3 emulation 169 PS Emulation Driver settings 176 PS Emulation Unidriver 258 Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL traditional drivers 123, 125 Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers 205 354 Index substitution table, PS Emulation Driver 177 substitution table, unidrivers 254 TrueType download option 349 unidriver settings 203 Upload Fonts, HP Printer Utility 295 Windows 50, 52 Form to Tray Assignment, unidrivers 253 Front Cover settings PCL traditional drivers 143 unidrivers 217 FTP direct printing, Macintosh 310 direct printing, Windows 332 Windows firmware updates 324 Full Installation choosing 23 dialog boxes, Windows 59 G Graphic settings PCL traditional drivers 125 unidrivers 203 Graphics Mode, HP PCL 5 Unidriver 205 Graphics tab, PS Emulation Driver 174 grayscale settings, PS Emulation Unidriver 258 guides. See documentation H Halftone settings PS Emulation Driver 176 hard disk printer 260 PS Emulation Driver settings 188 unidriver settings 260 heavy paper, paper type commands 319 help Bubble 108 Macintosh 271 operating systems supported 342 PCL traditional drivers 107 PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 199 Help button, Windows installation dialog boxes 57 HP Device Installer Customization Wizard 83 HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 35 HP Driver Preconfiguration driver support 339 operating systems and drivers supported 33 status, PCL traditional drivers 158 HP Easy Printer Care 36 HP Embedded Web Server about 37 alerts page 41 AutoSend page 41 Configuration Page 40 Configuration section 46 Configure Device page 41, 42 Device Information page 38, 42 Device Status page 39 Diagnostics section 47 documentation 19 E-mail Server page 41 HP Printer Utility, accessing from 306 HP Web Jetadmin 37 Information tab 38 language, setting 42 links 39, 41 navigation 38 Network settings 46 Networking tab 45 Security page 41, 44 Security section 47 Settings tab 41 time settings 42 user guide 37 HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW) 9 HP Instant Support 39 ENWW HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 20 HP Jetdirect page, printing 38 HP Network Registry Agent (HPNRA) 29 HP OpenVMS 9 HP PCL traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers HP PCL unidrivers. See PCL unidrivers HP Printer Utility, Macintosh about 287 accessing 287 Bonjour Setting 305 Device Information 293 Duplex mode 297 E-mail Alerts 303 Embedded Web Server access 306 File Upload 294 HP Support 296 Lock Resources 301 Network Settings 304 Supplies Status 290 Tray Configuration 300 Update Firmware 295 Upload Fonts 295 HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver. See PS Emulation Unidriver HP Registration dialog box, Windows 82 HP Software License Agreement dialog box, Windows 61 HP Toolbox, not supported 21 HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver. See PS Emulation Driver HP Web Jetadmin downloading 24, 48 Driver Preconfiguration Plugin 31, 32 firmware updates 329 HP Embedded Web Server 37 HPNRA (HP Network Registry Agent) 29 HPPJL Encoding 183 HTML files, viewing 18 ENWW I Ignore Application Collation, PCL traditional drivers 162, 166 inches, settings 141 Include types in application source list option in drivers 166 Incompatible Print Settings messages. See constraint messages Information tab, HP Embedded Web Server 38 input trays. See trays Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW) 9 install notes 19 Installable Options PS Emulation Driver 187 PS Emulation Unidriver 259 installation Add Printer 82 Adobe Acrobat Reader 24 command-line silent 101 Customization Wizard for Windows 83 dialog boxes, Mac OS X 272 File to E-mail utility 312 Macintosh printing-system software 272 Point and Print 102 pre-existing, modifying 58 system requirements for Macintosh 266 system requirements for Windows 7 Windows printing-system software 56 Installation Type dialog box, Windows 71 installers availability by operating system 10 common, features 24 customizing 83 Windows 22 Installing dialog box, Customization Wizard 100 Installing dialog box, Windows 79 Instant Support 39 Internet Services, unidrivers 251 IP address, locating 38 J Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 20 Job Notification Options PCL traditional drivers 152 Job storage enabling in PCL traditional drivers 164 Macintosh 302 operating systems supported 343 PCL traditional drivers 148 PS Emulation Driver 183, 188 unidriver settings 242, 260 job storage features 5 job stream output support 337 Job Timeout settings 191, 258 job tracking 337 JPEG Passthrough 262 L landscape orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 118, 156 PS Emulation Driver 172 unidrivers 238, 241 Language Selection dialog box, Customization Wizard 85, 87 Language Selection dialog box, Windows 59 languages CD-ROMs, Macintosh 268 CD-ROMs, Windows 11 HP Embedded Web Server 42 Language Selection dialog box, Windows installation 59 Last Page settings PCL traditional drivers 145 unidrivers 220 Layout Options unidrivers 206 Layout settings PS Emulation Driver 172 letterhead, alternative mode PCL traditional drivers 166 unidrivers 206 Index 355 license agreement dialog box, Windows 61 links, HP Embedded Web Server 39, 41 Linux operating systems driver availability 8 local port command line printing, Windows 333 localized CD-ROMs Macintosh 268 Windows 11 lockable features, drivers 33, 301 LPR commands firmware updates 328 printing PDF files 334 M Macintosh operating systems Bonjour Setting 305 components, software 270 Device Information 293 dialog boxes, Mac OS X printingsystem software installation 272 direct printing 331 directory structure, software CDROM 267 e-mail alerts 303 File Upload command 294 firmware upgrades 308, 309 fonts supported 271 HP Printer Utility 287 install notes 271 installing printing-system software 272 localized software CDs 268 locking driver features 301 Mac OS 9, not supported 266 Mac OS X Classic, not supported 266 network settings 304 network setup 271 online help 271 PDEs 270 PPDs 270 setting up devices with Mac OS X 285 software components 266 stored jobs 302 356 Index supplies status 290 support 7 system requirements 266 tray configuration 300 uninstalling printing-system software 286 Update Firmware 295 Upload Fonts 295 manuals. See documentation margins PCL 6 driver 317 PS Emulation Driver 173 measurement units 141 media. See paper memory base 4 installation requirements for Macintosh 266 installation requirements for Windows operating systems 7 PCL traditional driver settings 166 PS Emulation Driver settings 182 PS Emulation Unidriver settings 257 unidriver settings 260 messages, constraint PCL traditional drivers 107 unidrivers 199 Microsoft Point and Print installation 102 millimeters, settings 141 mirror image, PS Emulation Driver 176 model scripts, UNIX 9 models features 4 PCL traditional driver settings 160 moire effect, handling 124, 125 Mopier settings PCL traditional drivers 162 PS Emulation Driver 188 unidriver 260 More Configuration Options, PCL traditional drivers 164 More Options, PS Emulation Driver 173 MS Windows Cluster Server 8 support 9 N negative image, PS Emulation Driver 176 Network settings, HP Embedded Web Server 46 Networking tab, HP Embedded Web Server 45 networks bidirectional communication support 338 direct printing 334 Embedded Jetdirect page, printing 38 firewalls 63 firmware updates 327 HP Driver Preconfiguration 31 HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 20 HP Web Jetadmin, downloading 48 Macintosh settings 304 Macintosh setup 271 Point and Print installation 102 TCP/IP Settings, Windows installation dialog box 71 Windows printing-system software installation 57 Next steps dialog box, Windows 81 Novell NetWare operating systems, Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 30 number of copies, setting PCL traditional drivers 156 PS Emulation Driver 173 unidrivers 203, 261 O online help. See help operating systems availability of software components 9 bidirectional communication support 339 bins supported 340 ENWW Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 29 Help feature support 342 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 339 Postscript feature support 348 Services tab support 341 standalone drivers 8 support 7 user interface support 341 Optimizations option, PCL unidrivers 204 Optional Paper Sources, PCL traditional drivers 163 ordering supplies 24 orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 118, 156 PS Emulation Driver 172 unidrivers 238, 241 Other Pages paper settings PCL traditional drivers 145 unidrivers 219 output bins. See bins Output Protocol settings, PS Emulation Unidriver 257 Output Settings, PCL traditional drivers 123, 125 P Page Order settings PCL traditional drivers 121 unidrivers 206, 240 page orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 118, 156 PS Emulation Driver 172 unidrivers 238, 241 Page Setup tab, PS Emulation Driver 169 pages per minute 4 Pages per Sheet settings PCL traditional drivers 120 unidrivers 240 paper Alternative Letterhead Mode 166, 206 custom sizes, PCL driver support 318 ENWW custom sizes, PCL traditional driver settings 137 custom sizes, PCL unidriver settings 213 driver support 343 Include types in application source list setting 166 margins 317 Pages per Sheet settings, PCL traditional drivers 120 Pages per Sheet settings, unidrivers 240 Print Document On settings, PCL traditional drivers 128 Print Document On settings, unidrivers 227 Print on Both Sides settings, unidrivers 235 Print on Both Sides, PCL traditional drivers 115 PS Emulation Driver settings 170 size commands 317 Size is settings, PCL traditional drivers 136 Size is settings, unidrivers 213 sizes supported 5 source commands 314 Source is settings, PCL traditional drivers 141 Source is settings, unidrivers 215 sources and destinations 314 type commands 319 Type is: settings, PCL traditional drivers 142 Type is: settings, unidrivers 216 types and sizes supported 314 types supported 317 Paper Handling Options, PCL traditional drivers 161 Paper Options PCL traditional drivers 136 unidrivers 212 Paper tab, PCL traditional drivers 135 Paper/Output settings, unidrivers 202 Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 207 parallel port direct-connect installation 58 PCL documents, printing 38 PCL files, command-line printing 331 PCL traditional drivers About button 157 accessing 105 Alternative Letterhead Mode 166 alternative source support 346 Basics tab 155 bidirectional communication support 339 bins supported 340 Booklet Printing 119 bundle support 340 Configuration Status 158 Configure tab 159 connectivity support 338 custom paper sizes 318 destination support 347 device image 147 Document Options 114 document preview image 121, 129, 147, 157 duplexing unit settings 162 Effects tab 127 finishing options 347 Finishing tab 110 Fit to Page settings 128 font support 348 Graphic settings 125 Help feature support 342 Help system 107 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 Ignore Application Collation 166 Include types in application source list setting 166 included 26 installable options support 340 Job Storage, enabling 164 job stream output support 337 Index 357 job tracking 337 Job-storage settings 148 job-storage support 343 margins 317 media supported 314 memory settings 166 Mopier Enabled settings 162 More Configuration Options 164 operating-system support 9 Optional Paper Sources 163 Output Settings 123, 125 Paper Handling Options 161 Paper Options 136 paper size commands 317 paper source commands 314 paper supported 343 Paper tab 135 paper type commands 319 PJL encoding 337 preconfiguration support 339 Print Quality Details settings 122, 124 Print Quality group box 122 Print Task Quick Sets 111 Print Task Quick Sets support 342 Printer Model box 160 quality settings 344 reordering options 345 resizing options support 345 Scale to Fit 128 Services tab 341 settings 103 tray assignment 340 Update Now 30 Update Now button 166 user interface support 341 version numbers 26 Watermarks settings 130 watermarks support 346 PCL unidrivers % of Normal Size 228 About tab 263 accessing 197 Advanced Printing Features 204 Advanced tab 201 Alternative Letterhead Mode 206 358 Index alternative source support 346 Automatic Configuration 259 bidirectional communication support 339 bins supported 340 booklets 239 bundle support 340 connectivity support 338 Copy Count settings 203 custom paper sizes 318 destination support 347 Device Services 251 Device Settings tab 252 Document Options 204, 235 document preview image 222, 228, 241 duplexing 235 Effects tab 225 External Fonts settings 255 features 195 finishing options 347 Finishing tab 233 Flip Pages Up 238 Font DIMM Installer 255 Font Substitution Table 254 font support 348 Form to Tray Assignment 253 Graphic setting 203 Graphics Mode 205 Help feature support 342 Help system 199 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 included 26 Installable Options settings 259 installable options support 340 job stream output support 337 job tracking 337 Job-storage settings 242 job-storage support 343 Layout Options 206 media supported 314 Mopier settings 260 Pages per Sheet 240 Paper Options 212 paper size commands 317 paper supported 343 paper type commands 319 Paper/Output settings 202 Paper/Quality tab 207 PJL encoding 337 preconfiguration support 339 Print Optimizations option 204 Print Quality settings 223 Print Task Quick Sets 208 Print Task Quick Sets support 342 Printer Features 205 Printing Preferences tab 197 Properties tab 198 quality settings 344 reordering options 345 Resizing Options settings 227 resizing options support 345 Scale to Fit 227 Services tab 250, 341 tray assignment 340 TrueType font settings 203 unidrivers 251 Update Now 30 user interface support 341 version numbers 26 Watermarks settings 228 watermarks support 346 PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions) 270 PDF files command-line printing 331 installing Adobe Acrobat Reader 24 LPR commands, printing 334 Macintosh, File Upload command 294 printing using HP Embedded Web Server 38 viewing 18 Percentage of Normal Size setting PCL traditional drivers 129 unidrivers 228 PINs, private jobs PCL traditional drivers 152 unidrivers 246 PJL encoding 337 Point and Print installation, Windows printing-system software 102 ENWW Port Creation Options dialog box, Customization Wizard 91 port selection dialog box, Windows Customization Wizard 88 portrait orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 118, 156 PS Emulation Driver 172 unidrivers 238, 241 ports, included 6 PostScript Device settings, PS Emulation Unidriver 256 postscript documents, printing 38 PostScript Options, unidrivers 204 PostScript Passthrough 261 Postscript printer description (PPD) files 270 PostScript tab Advanced button 191 bitmap compression 192 Ctrl-D settings 193 data format 193 error information 191 header 191 language level 192 output format 190 PS Emulation Driver 189 timeout value 191 PPD (postscript printer description) files 270 pre-existing installation, modifying 58 preconfiguration, driver 31 preview image, document PCL traditional drivers 121, 129, 147, 157 unidrivers 241 Print All Text as Black PCL traditional drivers 124, 126 unidrivers 205 Print Document On settings PCL traditional drivers 128 unidrivers 227 print modes 116 Print on Both Sides PCL traditional driver settings 115 ENWW PS Emulation Driver 173 unidriver settings 235 Print Optimizations option, PCL unidrivers 204 Print Page Borders settings PCL traditional drivers 120 unidrivers 240 Print Quality Details, PCL traditional drivers 122, 124 Print Quality settings driver support 344 PCL traditional drivers 122 PS Emulation Driver 185 unidrivers 223 Print Task Quick Sets, PCL traditional drivers about 111 defaults 111 use guide 114 Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers about 208 custom 212 defaults 209 use guide 211 print-ready files command-line printing 331 printing by FTP 331 printing by local Windows port 333 printing by Windows network 334 printing in UNIX systems 334 printing using HP Embedded Web Server 38 printing with LPR command 334 Printer Connection dialog box, Full Installation 61 printer control panel settings traditional drivers 103 unidrivers 195 Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) 270 Printer Driver Test Page dialog box, Windows 81 Printer Features, unidrivers 205 Printer Found dialog box, Windows 65, 66 Printer Model features 4 PCL traditional driver settings 160 Printer Not Found dialog box, Windows 64 Printer Port dialog box, Customization Wizard 88 Printer Properties dialog box, Customization Wizard 97 Printer Properties dialog box, Windows 75 Printer Settings dialog box, Windows 69 printer, setting default 102 printing direct in a Windows network 334 direct in UNIX 334 direct using FTP 331 direct using local Windows port 333 direct using LPR command 334 files using HP Embedded Web Server 38 User Guide 19 Printing Preferences tabs 197 Private job settings PCL traditional drivers 152 unidrivers 246 PRN files, printing 38 product support 39 Proof and Hold job settings PCL traditional drivers 151 unidrivers 245 Properties tabs unidrivers 198 protocols PS Emulation Unidriver 257 Windows installation dialog box 71 PS 3 font emulation 169 PS Emulation Driver About 174 accessing 168 alternative source support 346 bidirectional communication support 339 Index 359 bins supported 340 bundle support 340 collation settings 185 connectivity support 338 context-sensitive help 169 copies, number of 173 destination support 347 Device Options tab 180 features 168, 348 finishing options 347 Fit to Page 185 font support 348 Fonts tab 176 Graphics tab 174 halftone settings 176 Help feature support 342 Help system 169 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 HPPJL Encoding 183 included 26 Installable Options 187 installable options support 340 job stream output support 337 job tracking 337 job-storage settings 183, 188 job-storage support 343 Layout settings 172 media supported 314 memory settings 182 mirror image, printing 176 Mopier Mode 188 More Options 173 negative image, printing 176 operating-system support 9 Page Setup tab 169 paper supported 343 PJL encoding 337 PostScript tab 189 preconfiguration support 339 Print Task Quick Sets support 342 Printer features group box 182 Printing on Both Sides 173 PS 3 font emulation 169 quality settings 344 reordering options 345 resizing options support 345 360 Index resolution settings 175 Scaling control 176 Services tab 341 tray assignment 340 tray settings 172 Unprintable Area 173 user interface support 341 version number 26 Watermark settings 185 Watermarks settings 186 watermarks support 346 Window duplexing unit settings 188 PS emulation fonts 52 PS Emulation Unidriver % of Normal Size 228 About tab 263 accessing 197 Advanced Printing Features 204 Advanced tab 201 Alternative Letterhead Mode 206 alternative source support 346 Automatic Configuration 259 bidirectional communication support 339 bins supported 340 booklets 239 bundle support 340 connectivity support 338 Copy Count settings 203 Ctrl-D settings 257 destination support 347 Device Services 251 Device Settings tab 252 Document Options 204, 235 document preview image 222, 228, 241 duplexing 235 Effects tab 225 features 195, 348 finishing options 347 Finishing tab 233 Flip Pages Up 238 Font DIMM Installer 255 font settings 258 Font Substitution Table 254 font support 348 Form to Tray Assignment 253 Graphic setting 203 Help feature support 342 Help system 199 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 included 26 Installable Options settings 259 installable options support 340 Internet Services 251 JEPG Passthrough 262 job stream output support 337 job tracking 337 Job-storage settings 242 job-storage support 343 Layout Options 206 media supported 314 Mopier settings 260 operating-system support 9 Output Protocol settings 257 Pages per Sheet 240 Paper Options 212 paper supported 343 Paper/Output settings 202 Paper/Quality tab 207 PJL encoding 337 PostScript Device settings 256 PostScript Memory settings 257 PostScript Options 204 PostScript Passthrough 261 preconfiguration support 339 Print Quality settings 223 Print Task Quick Sets 208 Print Task Quick Sets support 342 Printer Features 205 Printing Preferences tabs 197 Properties tabs 198 quality settings 344 reordering options 345 Resizing Options settings 227 resizing options support 345 Scale to Fit 227 Services tab 250, 341 timeout settings 258 tray assignment 340 ENWW TrueType font settings 203 user interface support 341 version number 26 Watermarks settings 228 watermarks support 346 PS files, command-line printing 331 Q quality settings. See Print Quality settings Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick Sets R Ready to Create Installer dialog box 97 Ready to Install dialog box, Windows 75 regional versions, CD-ROMs Macintosh 268 Windows 11 Registration dialog box, Windows 82 releasing job-storage jobs PCL traditional drivers 154 PS Emulation Driver 184 unidrivers 248 remote firmware updates about 320 determining current firmware level 320 downloading 321 FTP, Windows 324 HP Web Jetadmin 329 LPR commands 328 Macintosh 295, 308, 309 messages 321 troubleshooting 321 UNIX 328 verifying installation 323 Windows network 327 Windows, using local port 325 reordering options 345 Resizing Options driver support 345 unidriver settings 227 resolution driver support 344 ENWW PCL traditional driver settings 123, 125 PS Emulation Driver settings 175 unidriver settings 223 RFU. See remote firmware updates S SAP printing 9 Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature 124, 125 Scale to Fit setting PCL traditional drivers 128 unidrivers 227 Scaling control, PS Emulation Driver 176 screen-readable documentation 18 Searching dialog box, Windows 62 Security page, HP Embedded Web Server 41, 44 Security section, HP Embedded Web Server 47 Send Ctrl-D settings 193, 257 Send TrueType as Bitmaps PCL traditional drivers 123, 125 PCL unidrivers 205 serial number 38 Services tab 250, 341 Set Port Name dialog box, Windows 70 settings continuous export 33 locking 33 overriding 103, 195 Print Task Quick Sets, PCL traditional drivers 111 Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers 208 Settings tab, HP Embedded Web Server 41 silent installation command-line 101 Customization Wizard 83 sizes, paper commands 317 custom 318 margins 317 PCL Traditional Driver settings 136 Print on Both Sides settings, unidrivers 235 Print on Both sides, PCL traditional drivers 115 PS Emulation Driver settings 170 supported 314 unidriver settings 213 sleep mode 4 smart duplexing 235 Source is settings PCL traditional drivers 141 PS Emulation Driver 172 unidrivers 215 sources, paper. See trays Specify Printer dialog box, Windows 68 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box, Customization Wizard 90 speed specifications 4 standalone drivers 8 status devices 39 Macintosh supplies 290 supplies 38 storage, job enabling in PCL traditional drivers 164 Macintosh 302 operating systems supported 343 PCL traditional drivers 148 PS Emulation Driver 183, 188 unidriver settings 242, 260 substitution table for fonts, PS Emulation Driver 177 supplies AutoSend page, HP Embedded Web Server 41 features 6 Macintosh status 290 ordering 24 usage AutoSend page 41 viewing status 38 Support tab, HP Printer Utility 296 support, product 39 Index 361 system requirements Macintosh 266 Windows 7 T TBCP output protocol, PS Emulation Unidriver 257 TCP/IP address, locating 38 Test Page dialog box, Windows 81 text files, command-line printing 331 text, printing all as black PCL traditional drivers 124, 126 unidriver 205 time settings, HP Embedded Web Server 42 timeout settings 191, 258 Toolbox, not supported 21 traditional drivers. See PCL traditional drivers; PS Emulation Driver transparencies, paper type commands 319 trays Alternative Letterhead Mode 166, 206 autoconfiguration 28 custom paper sizes 140, 214 driver support 340 included 6, 314 Installable Options, PS Emulation Driver 187 Macintosh configuration 300 media supported 5, 317 paper source commands 314 paper type commands 319 PCL traditional driver settings 163 PS Emulation Driver settings 172 Source is settings, PCL traditional drivers 141 Source is settings, unidrivers 215 unidriver configuration 259 unidriver Form to Tray Assignment 253 362 Index troubleshooting duplexing unit, Macintosh 297 File to E-mail utility 312 firmware upgrades 321 HP driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 35 Services tab, unidrivers 250 Tru64 UNIX printing 9 TrueType font settings PS Emulation Unidriver 258 Send as Bitmap, PCL traditional drivers 123, 125 Send as Bitmap, PCL unidrivers 205 substitution table, PS Emulation Driver 177 unidrivers 203 two-sided printing PCL traditional driver settings 115 PS Emulation Driver 173 unidriver settings 235 TXT files, command-line printing 331 Type is settings PCL traditional drivers 142 unidrivers 216 types, paper Include in application source list setting 166 PCL traditional drivers settings 142 Print on Both Sides settings, unidrivers 235 Print on Both sides, PCL traditional drivers 115 supported 317 unidriver settings 216 U unattended installation command-line 101 Customization Wizard 83 unidrivers % of Normal Size 228 About tab 263 accessing 197 Advanced Printing Features 204 Advanced tab 201 Alternative Letterhead Mode 206 alternative source support 346 Automatic Configuration 259 automatic configuration 30 bidirectional communication support 339 bins supported 340 booklets 239 bundle support 340 connectivity support 338 constraint messages 199 Copy Count settings 203 custom paper sizes 318 destination support 347 Device Services 251 Device Settings tab 252 Document Options 204, 235 document preview image 222, 228, 241 duplexing 235 Effects tab 225 features 195 finishing options 347 Finishing tab 233 Flip Pages Up 238 Font DIMM Installer 255 font settings 255 Font Substitution Table 254 font support 348 Form to Tray Assignment 253 Graphic setting 203 Graphics Mode 205 Help feature support 342 Help system 199 HP Driver Preconfiguration 33 Installable Options settings 259 Internet Services 251 job stream output support 337 job tracking 337 Job-storage settings 242 job-storage support 343 JPEG Passthrough 262 Layout Options 206 media supported 314 Mopier settings 260 Pages per Sheet 240 Paper Options 212 ENWW paper size commands 317 paper supported 343 paper type commands 319 Paper/Output settings 202 Paper/Quality tab 207 PJL encoding 337 PostScript Options 204 PostScript Passthrough 261 preconfiguration support 339 Print Quality settings 223 Print Task Quick Sets 208 Print Task Quick Sets support 342 Printer Features 205 Printing Preferences tabs 197 Properties tabs 198 quality settings 344 reordering options 345 Resizing Options settings 227 resizing options support 345 Scale to Fit 227 Services tab 250, 341 tray assignment 340 TrueType font settings 203 Update Now 30 user interface support 341 version numbers 26 Watermarks settings 228 watermarks support 346 uninstallation Macintosh printing system 286 units of measurement 141 UNIX operating systems direct printing 334 driver availability 9 print-ready printing 334 remote firmware update 328 Web site for 7 Unprintable Area, PS Emulation Driver 173 Unsupported Operating System dialog box, Windows installation 60 Update Now feature 29, 30, 166 updating firmware remotely. See remote firmware updates usage page 38 USB direct-connect installation 58 ENWW Use Different Paper, PCL traditional drivers 143 Use Different Paper/Covers, unidrivers 217 User Guide 18 User Name, stored jobs PCL traditional drivers 152 unidrivers 247 V version numbers, drivers 26 W Wait Timeout settings 191, 258 wake time, setting 4 Watermarks settings drivers supported 346 PCL traditional drivers 130 PS Emulation Driver 185, 186 unidrivers 228 Web Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin Web sites Adobe 169 Citrix Terminal server support 9 downloading software 10 firmware download 321 HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 35 HP Easy Printer Care 36 HP Embedded Web Server links 39, 41 HP Embedded Web Server user guide 37 HP OpenVMS 9 HP Web Jetadmin, downloading 48 Linux product support 7 Macintosh software 267 SAP printing 9 support links 24 Tru64 UNIX printing 9 UNIX model scripts 9 UNIX support 7 Welcome dialog box, Customization Wizard 86 Welcome dialog box, Windows installation Full Installation 60 What's this? Help PS Emulation Driver 169 unidrivers 199 Windows operating systems Add Printer installation 82 availability of software components 9 CD-ROM, print system 22 default printer, setting 102 dialog boxes 59 direct printing, FTP 331 direct printing, local port 333 direct printing, networks 334 directory structure, software CDROM 10 driver versions 26 Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 29 fonts supported 50 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 Installer Customization Wizard 83 installers 10 installing printing software 56 LPR commands 334 Point and Print installation 102 PS Emulation Driver features 168 PS emulation fonts supported 52 remote firmware update 325 support 7 system requirements 7 unidriver features 195 Index 363 364 Index ENWW © 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com ">
/
Download
Just a friendly reminder. You can view the document right here. But most importantly, our AI has already read it. It can explain complex things in simple terms, answer your questions in any language, and help you quickly navigate even the longest or most compilcated documents.
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Supports PCL 6, PCL 5, and PostScript 3 emulation drivers
Includes bidirectional communication and autoconfiguration
Offers job storage modes (Proof and Hold, Private Job)
Supports duplex printing (manual and automatic)
Has watermarking and booklet printing features
Frequently asked questions
Install from the printing-system CD or download files, then follow the installer steps (Basic, Full, or Custom installation).
The printer supports Off, Proof and Hold, and Private Job modes, with options for PIN and job notification.
Use the Finishing tab in the print driver to select "Print on Both Sides" (automatic or manual) and adjust settings like flip pages up.
The EWS provides access to device status, configuration pages, settings (alerts, security), and networking options.
In the Paper tab, select "Custom", enter width and height, name it, and save.